Nb designer руководство по программированию

NB-Designer OPERATION MANUAL

Cat. No. V106-E1-22

Programmable Terminals

NB3Q-TWB NB5Q-TWB NB7W-TWB NB10W-TW01B

NB-series

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.

No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Neverthe- less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.

Sysmac and SYSMAC are trademarks or registered trademarks of OMRON Corporation in Japan and other countries for OMRON factory automation products.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Excel are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

EtherCAT is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.

ODVA, CIP, CompoNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA.

The SD and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Trademarks

Copyrights

NOTE

Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

NB-series NB3Q-TWB NB5Q-TWB NB7W-TWB NB10W-TW01B Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual Revised October 2020

1

Introduction

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing an NB-series Programmable Terminal.

NB-Series Programmable Terminals (PTs) are designed to handle information generated in FA production sites. Be sure to understand the functions and performances etc thoroughly before using PT correctly.

This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent). Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities. Personnel in charge of designing FA systems. Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA facilities. Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities

The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.

Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.

Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.

Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.

This manual provides information for connecting and setting up an NB-Series PT. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the PT and keep this manual close at hand for reference during installation and operation.

Intended Audience

General Precautions

NB-series Manuals

2 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

NB-series Manuals

NB-series manuals are organized in the sections listed in the following tables. Refer to the appropriate section in the manuals as required.

Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual (Cat. No. V106) (This manual)

Section Contents

Section 1 Introduction This section provides an outline of the NB-series PTs, including their functions, features, connection types and communication methods.

Section 2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

This section describes how to install and start the NB-Designer.

Section 3 Functions of NB-Designer This section describes the functions of NB-Designer.

Section 4 Functions of NBManager This section describes the functions of NBManager.

Section 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling

This section describes the maintenance and check to prevent the abnormality occurrence and the handling of the abnormalities occurred in NB Unit.

Section 6 Functions Related to External Memory

This section describes the functions related to external memory.

Section 7 PictBridge Printing This section describes the PictBridge printing function.

Section 8 Web Interface This section describes the Web Interface function.

Appendices The appendices provide lists of the NB Units, the Communication Units, the applicable PLCs, the memories sapported by PLC, and the list of NB-Designer functions.

Programmable Terminals Setup Manual (Cat. No. V107) Section Contents

Section 1 Part Names and Functions This section describes the names and functions of the various parts of an NB Unit.

Section 2 Installing the NB Unit and Connecting Peripheral Devices

This section describes the methods used to install the NB Unit and connect peripheral devices.

Section 3 System Setting Mode This section describes the System Setting Mode.

Section 4 Calibrate Mode This section describes the Calibrate Mode.

Appendices The appendices provide information on specifications, dimensions, wirings, and lists of the NB Units, the applicable PLCs and options.

3

NB-series Manuals

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Programmable Terminals Host Connection Manual (Cat. No. V108) Section Contents

Section 1 List for All PLCs Supported by NB series

This section lists all PLCs supported by NB Units.

Section 2 Connecting to SIEMENS PLCs

This section describes the connection to SIEMENS PLCs.

Section 3 Connecting to Mitsubishi PLCs

This section describes the connection to Mitsubishi PLCs.

Section 4 Connecting to Schneider PLCs

This section describes the connection to Schneider PLCs.

Section 5 Modbus Connection This section describes the connection on Modbus protocol.

Section 6 Connecting to Delta PLCs This section describes the connection to Delta PLCs.

Section 7 Connecting to LG PLCs This section describes the connection to LG PLCs.

Section 8 Connecting to Panasonic PLCs

This section describes the connection to Panasonic PLCs.

Section 9 Connecting to Allen- Bradley (Rockwell) PLC

This section describes the connection to Allen-Bradley PLC.

Section 10 Connecting to PLC of GE Fanuc Automation Inc.

This section describes the connection to PLC of GE Fanuc Automation Inc.

Section 11 Connecting to Keyence PLCs

This section describes the connection to Keyence PLCs.

Section 12 Connecting to OMRON Safety Controller

This section describes the connection to OMRON Safety Controller.

Programmable Terminals Startup Guide Manual (Cat. No. V109) Section Contents

Section 1 NB Overview This section provide specifications of the NB Unit, describes its names and functions of the various parts.

Section 2 System Design This section describes the manual structure, takes NB7W as an example to introduce the operation procedures of the NB system.

Section 3 Installation and Wiring This section describes how to install and wire the NB Unit.

Section 4 Screen Creation This section describes how to create a demonstration project through NB-Designer.

Section 5 Run This section describes how to start running at the Host side and prepare to send screen data to NB7W.

Section 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

This section describes the maintenance and inspection methods for preventing errors occurring, and troubleshooting measures when errors occur.

WARNING

Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.

Manual Structure

4 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Manual Structure

The following page structure and icons are used in this manual.

Special information in this manual is classified as follows:

Page Structure and Icons

Special Information

2-3

2 Installing the NB Unit and Connecting Peripheral Devices

NB-series Programmable Terminals Setup Manual(V107)

2-1 In stallin

g th

e N B

U n

it

2

2-1-2 Installation onto the O peration P

anel

Install the NB Unit by embedding it into the operation panel.

Use the metal kit and tool (a crosshead screwdriver) supplied with the Unit for installation.

Proceed the installation following the procedures below.

1 Panel cutout with dimensions is shown below. Fit the NB Unit into the panel from the front side.

2 As follows, insert panel fixators at the locations indicated by red box around the back of the NB Unit.

Insert the hooks of positioners into the square holes on the Unit to hold the fixators properly, and tighten the screws firmly with the screwdriver.

NB5Q/NB7W-TWB

Precautions for Safe Use

When operating on the operation panel, make sure to keep metal particles from entering the Unit.

The mounting panel must be between 1.6 and 4.8 mm thick. The NB Unit must be installed in a control panel.

For the sake of waterproof and dustproof, all the fixators must be evenly tightened to a torque of 0.5~0.6 Nm. If the tightening torque exceeds the specified value, or the tightening is not even, deformation of the front panel may occur.

Make sure that the operation panel is clean, unbent, and strong enough for the installation process.

2-1-2 Installation onto the Operation Panel

Models Opening Dimension (W H mm)

NB3Q-TW00B/TW01B 119.0(+0.5/-0) 93.0(+0.5/-0)

NB5Q-TW00B/TW01B 172.4(+0.5/-0) 131.0(+0.5/-0)

NB7W-TW00B/TW01B 191.0(+0.5/-0) 137.0(+0.5/-0)

NB10W-TW01B 258.0(+0.5/-0) 200.0(+0.5/-0)

Opening dimensions

Width

Height

Level 1 heading Level 2 heading Level 3 heading

Step in a procedure

Manual name

Special Information (See below.)

Level 3 heading

Page tab

Gives the current headings.

Indicates a step in a procedure.

Gives the number of the section.

This illustration is provided only as a sample and may not literally appear in this manual.

Icons are used to indicate precautions and additional information.

Precautions for Safe Use Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely.

Precautions for Correct Use Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.

Additional Information Additional information to increase understanding or make operation easier.

5

Terminology

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Terminology

The following terminology is used in this manual.

Terms Descriptions

NB Unit Indicates the main Unit of the products in the OMRON NB Series of Programmable Terminal.

NB Series Indicates products in the OMRON NB Series of Programmable Terminal. In this manual, unless otherwise specified, NB Series is taken as the subject concerned.

PLC Indicates a Programmable Controller.

CP Series Indicates the following products in the OMRON CP Series of Programmable Controllers: CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E

CS/CJ Series Indicates the following products in the OMRON CS/CJ Series of Programmable Controllers: CS1G, CS1H, CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2M, CJ2H

NJ/NX Series Indicates the following OMRON SYSMAC NJ/NX Series of Programmable Controllers: NJ501, NJ301, NJ101, NX102, NX1P2

C Series Indicates the following products in the OMRON C Series of Programmable Controllers: C200HX(-Z), C200HG(-Z), C200HE(-Z), CQM1, CQM1H, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C

Serial Communication Unit

Indicates a Serial Communication Unit for an OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ-Series PLC.

Serial Communication Board

Indicates a Serial Communication Board for an OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ-Series PLC.

Communication Board Indicates a Communication Board for an OMRON C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PLC.

CPU Unit Indicates a CPU Unit in the OMRON CP, CS/CJ or SYSMAC C Series of Programmable Controllers.

NB-Designer Indicates the OMRON NB-Designer.

Host Indicates the PLC and other units functioning as the control devices for NB-Series Units.

PT Indicates an OMRON Programmable Terminal.

Terminology

6 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

7

CONTENTS

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

CONTENTS

Introduction………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1

NB-series Manuals………………………………………………………………………………………. 2

Manual Structure ………………………………………………………………………………………… 4

Terminology ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5

Terms and Conditions Agreement ……………………………………………………………… 13

Safety Precautions ……………………………………………………………………………………. 15

Precautions for Safe Use …………………………………………………………………………… 18

Precautions for Correct Use ………………………………………………………………………. 20

Conformance to EC Directives …………………………………………………………………… 21

Related Manuals ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 22

Sec. 1 Introduction …………………………………………………………………. 1-1

1-1 Functions and Structure of NB-Series PTs………………………………………………………………… 1-2 1-1-1 How NB-Series PTs Work at FA Production Sites……………………………………………………………. 1-2

1-1-2 Operations of NB-Series PTs ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-2

1-2 Communicating with the Host…………………………………………………………………………………… 1-4 1-2-1 Whats the Host Link?………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-4

1-2-2 Connecting Methods……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-5

1-2-3 Communicating with the PLC Manufactured by Other Companies …………………………………….. 1-6

1-3 System Configuration ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-7 1-3-1 Connectable Peripheral Devices …………………………………………………………………………………… 1-7

1-4 Procedures for NB-Series PTs Operation …………………………………………………………………. 1-8

Sec. 2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer………………………… 2-1

2-1 Before Installation ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-2 2-2 Installation/Uninstallation…………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-3

2-2-1 Installation Procedure ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-3

2-2-2 Uninstallation Procedure………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-3

2-3 Startup & Quit ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-4 2-3-1 Starting Method ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-4

2-3-2 Quitting Method ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-4

2-4 Installation of USB Driver for NB ………………………………………………………………………………. 2-5

Sec. 3 Functions of NB-Designer…………………………………………….. 3-1

3-1 User Screen……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-4 3-2 Menus ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-7

3-2-1 File Menu…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-7

3-2-2 Edit Menu…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-11

3-2-3 View Menu……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-16

CONTENTS

8 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2-4 Screen Menu…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-27

3-2-5 Draw Menu……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-31

3-2-6 Components Menu…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-31

3-2-7 Tools Menu ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-32

3-2-8 Option Menu……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-32

3-2-9 Window Menu …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-33

3-2-10 Help Menu………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-34

3-3 NB-Designer Software Window……………………………………………………………………………….. 3-35 3-3-1 Project Library Window ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-35

3-3-2 Project File Window …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-39

3-3-3 Project Work Space …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-39

3-3-4 Output Window………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-45

3-3-5 Component List Window …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-46

3-4 Screen Concept ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-47 3-4-1 Screen Types……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-47

3-4-2 Screen Property ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-50

3-4-3 Screen Creation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-54

3-4-4 Screen Opening ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-54

3-4-5 Screen Deletion…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-55

3-4-6 Components Related to Screen…………………………………………………………………………………… 3-55

3-5 Basic Design Method ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-56 3-5-1 Designing Components………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-56

3-5-2 About ID No………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-57

3-5-3 Additional Comments (Descriptions)…………………………………………………………………………….. 3-58

3-5-4 Read/Write Address for PLC……………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-59

3-5-5 Vector Graphic ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-60

3-5-6 Bitmap……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-65

3-5-7 Creating Label…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-68

3-5-8 Task Bar and Operation Buttons………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-70

3-5-9 Fonts ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-72

3-5-10 Basic Properties of Component …………………………………………………………………………………… 3-75

3-5-11 Control Setting of Component……………………………………………………………………………………… 3-76

3-5-12 Display Setting of Component……………………………………………………………………………………… 3-80

3-6 Parts………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-82 3-6-1 Bit Button………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-82

3-6-2 Bit Lamp…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-85

3-6-3 Bit Switch …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-88

3-6-4 Command Button ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-89

3-6-5 Word Lamp……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-96

3-6-6 Word Switch……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-98

3-6-7 XY Graph ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-102

3-6-8 Moving Component ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-111

3-6-9 Animation ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-116

3-6-10 Number Input ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-118

3-6-11 Number Display……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-124

3-6-12 Text Input ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-127

3-6-13 Text Display ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-131

3-6-14 Level Meter …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-132

3-6-15 Analog Meter…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-143

3-6-16 Indirect Screen………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-147

3-6-17 Direct Screen ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-150

9

CONTENTS

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6-18 Alarm …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-152

3-6-19 Data Log ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-154

3-6-20 Recipe……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-164

3-6-21 Oscillograph……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-164

3-6-22 Scroll Bar ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-168

3-6-23 Event …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-171

3-6-24 Note Book………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-178

3-6-25 Word Neon Lamp…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-189

3-6-26 Bit Neon Lamp………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-190

3-6-27 Touch Trigger …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-191

3-6-28 Table……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-193

3-6-29 Data History ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-194

3-7 Function Parts ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-200 3-7-1 Scale……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-200

3-7-2 Function Key…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-201

3-7-3 Alarm Display………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-209

3-7-4 Timer……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-213

3-7-5 Bitmap……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-218

3-7-6 Vector Graphics ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-219

3-7-7 Notepad …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-220

3-7-8 Data Transmission…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-223

3-7-9 Freeplotting…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-226

3-7-10 Date/Time ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-227

3-7-11 Indirect Shape…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-229

3-7-12 User Information ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-233

3-7-13 Multifunction……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-233

3-7-14 Event Display………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-236

3-8 Project Database ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-238 3-8-1 Text Library…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-238

3-8-2 Variable Table…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-244

3-8-3 Alarm Setting ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-248

3-8-4 Event Setting ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-253

3-8-5 PLC Control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-257

3-9 Macro Function…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-265 3-9-1 Create a Simple Macro Program ……………………………………………………………………………….. 3-265

3-9-2 Macro and Specification of Operation with Read/Write Variables …………………………………… 3-272

3-9-3 Macro Triggering……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-273

3-9-4 Other Descriptions …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-276

3-10 System Parameters ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-290 3-10-1 PT …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-291

3-10-2 Task Bar ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-292

3-10-3 PT Extended Properties……………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-294

3-10-4 System Information Setting……………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-304

3-10-5 Security Levels Setting …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-306

3-10-6 User Permission Setting …………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-308

3-10-7 Event History Setting ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-322

3-10-8 COM1/COM2 Setting……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-324

3-10-9 External Memory……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-325

3-10-10 Ethernet Communication Setting ……………………………………………………………………………….. 3-327

CONTENTS

10 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-11 Address of System Memory ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-328 3-11-1 Local Bit (LB)…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-329

3-11-2 Local Word (LW) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-334

3-11-3 Nonvolatile Local Word (LW10000~10255) …………………………………………………………………. 3-339

3-11-4 System Information Table …………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-341

3-12 Recipe Data ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-343 3-12-1 Process of Creating One Recipe Component ………………………………………………………………. 3-343

3-12-2 Recipe Memory……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-345

3-12-3 Upload/Download of Recipe Data between PT and PLC……………………………………………….. 3-349

3-13 Security Level ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-354 3-14 Test ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-360

3-14-1 Offline test ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-360

3-14-2 Direct Online test……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-361

3-14-3 Indirect Online test …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-362

3-15 Download …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-363 3-15-1 Transmission Setting………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-363

3-15-2 Download via USB Memory ………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-366

3-15-3 Download to USB1…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-366

3-15-4 Specification of Downloading Contents……………………………………………………………………….. 3-366

3-16 Other Functions……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3-371 3-17 RecipeEditor ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-421

Sec. 4 Functions of NBManager ……………………………………………… 4-1

4-1 Introduction of NBManager ………………………………………………………………………………………. 4-2 4-2 Download Operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-3

4-2-1 Communication Setting ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-3

4-2-2 Select Data…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4-6

4-2-3 LOGO Setting……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-9

4-2-4 Clear Data………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-10

4-3 Upload Operation …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-12 4-4 System Operation…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-15 4-5 Get Version ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4-16 4-6 Decompile Operation ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-17 4-7 Pass Through Communication………………………………………………………………………………… 4-18 4-8 Web Interface Operation …………………………………………………………………………………………. 4-20

Sec. 5 Maintenance and Abnormality Handling ……………………….. 5-1

5-1 Maintenance…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5-2 5-2 Checking and Cleaning…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5-4 5-3 Abnormality Handling ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5-6 5-4 Unit Replacement Precautions………………………………………………………………………………… 5-10

11

CONTENTS

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Sec. 6 Functions Related to External Memory …………………………. 6-1

6-1 Components Related to External Memory …………………………………………………………………. 6-2 6-1-1 Function Key………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-2

6-1-2 Event, Event History Display and Event Display ……………………………………………………………… 6-5

6-1-3 Data History, Data Log and XY Graph……………………………………………………………………………. 6-7

6-1-4 Operation Log…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6-8

6-1-5 Recipe Data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-11

6-1-6 CSV Import / Export…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-12

6-1-7 PLC Control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6-13

6-1-8 File List ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-14

6-1-9 FTP Server ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-15

Sec. 7 PictBridge Printing ………………………………………………………. 7-1

7-1 PictBridge Function …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7-2 7-2 Setting Method for Using Printing Function ………………………………………………………………. 7-4 7-3 Components Related to Printing and Setup Descriptions ………………………………………….. 7-6

7-3-1 PLC Control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7-6

7-4 List of System memories Related to Printing …………………………………………………………….. 7-8 7-5 List of Error Codes for Printing…………………………………………………………………………………. 7-9 7-6 Recommended Printer Models………………………………………………………………………………… 7-10

Sec. 8 Web Interface ………………………………………………………………. 8-1

8-1 Defining Web Interface……………………………………………………………………………………………… 8-2 8-2 Setup Web Interface on a PC…………………………………………………………………………………….. 8-3 8-3 Connection Method and Each Page Function ……………………………………………………………. 8-4 8-4 URL List…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8-10

Sec. A Appendices…………………………………………………………………..A-1

A-1 List of Models …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..A-2

A-2 NB-Designer Function List ………………………………………………………………………………………..A-6

A-3 List of memories supported by OMRON PLC ……………………………………………………………A-11

A-4 Usage of Forced Address Bit …………………………………………………………………………………..A-16

Revision History …………………………………………………………………………………………. 1

CONTENTS

12 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

13

Terms and Conditions Agreement

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Terms and Conditions Agreement

Exclusive Warranty Omrons exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workman- ship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.

Limitations OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.

Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right.

Buyer Remedy Omrons sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omrons election, to (i) replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-com- plying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omrons analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combi- nation with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materi- als or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.

See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.

OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.

Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted.

Warranty, Limitations of Liability

Warranties

Limitation on Liability; Etc

Terms and Conditions Agreement

14 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a com- plete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriate- ness of the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases.

NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PROD- UCT(S) IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVER- ALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence thereof.

Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s represen- tative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.

Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.

Suitability of Use

Programmable Products

Disclaimers

Performance Data

Change in Specifications

Errors and Omissions

15

Safety Precautions

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Safety Precautions

The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product. The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety. Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions.

Notation Used for Safety Information

Symbols

The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you must not do.

The specific operation is shown in the circle and explained in text.

This example indicates prohibiting disassembly.

The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including warnings).

The specific operation is shown in the triangle and explained in text.

This example indicates a general precaution.

WARNING Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

Precautions for Safe Use Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely.

Precautions for Correct Use Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.

Note Indicates suggestive information and precautions on operation of the product.

Safety Precautions

16 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Do not attempt to take the product apart and do not touch the product inside while the power is being supplied. Otherwise it may result in electric shock.

Always ensure that the personnel in charge confirm that installation, inspection, and maintenance were properly performed for the NB Unit.

Personnel in charge refers to individuals qualified and responsible for ensuring safety during machine design, installation, operation, maintenance, and disposal.

Ensure that installation and post-installation checks are performed by personnel in charge who possess a thorough understanding of the machinery to be installed.

Do not use the input functions of the touch switch, etc. of the NB Unit, in applications that involve human life, in applications that may result in serious injury, or for emergency stop switches.

Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the NB Unit. Otherwise it may impair the safety functions.

Never press at two or more points on the touch panel of the NB Unit at a time. Otherwise, it may activate a switch somewhere between the two points.

WARNING

17

Safety Precautions

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Precaution

Wiring

In the case of the NB Series, when grounding the positive terminal of power supply of 24 V to the NB, do not ground functional grounding terminal at NB side. Some functions of a PC connected to the NB may cause a short circuit and the NB Unit may cause damage. Caution:

Depending on the types of PC, SG terminals of RS-232C port or USB port and contour of connector can be connected. As the contour of tool port of the NB and the functional grounding terminal are not insu- lated, they are connected. Therefore, connecting the PC allows GND terminal and functional grounding terminal of the NB to be connected. If the power supply of 24V to the NB is grounded positively, ground- ing the functional grounding terminal allows a short circuit as shown in the diagram below and may result in damage.

Test Function

The Test Function is performed on PC, and it has different behaviors with actual NB running system. A problem may occur due to communication timing, cable differences and unexpected PC circumstances (such as freeze). When the Test Function is performed, please consider possible unexpected circumstances on the actual NB running system and confirm that any dangerous event will not occur beforehand.

CAUTION

NB

SGSG

24V

0V GND

Power Supply

Grounding Grounding

Functional Grounding

Cable

Contour Contour

PC

Do not ground the functional grounding.

Precautions for Safe Use

18 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Precautions for Safe Use

When unpacking the NB Units and the peripheral devices, check carefully for any external scratches or other damages. Also, shake the Units gently and check for any abnormal sound.

The NB Unit must be installed in a control panel. The mounting panel must be between 1.6 and 4.8 mm thick. Tighten the Mounting Brackets evenly to a

torque of between 0.5 and 0.6 Nm to maintain water and dust resistance. If the tightening torque exceeds the specified value, or the tightening is not even, deformation of the front panel may occur. What is more, make sure the panel is not dirty or warped and that it is strong enough to hold the Units.

Do not let metal particles enter the Units when preparing the panel. Do not connect an AC power supply to the DC power terminals. Use a DC power with a slight voltage fluctuation and reinforced or double insulation, and that will

provide a stable output even if the input is momentarily interrupted for 10 ms. Rated Power Supply Voltage: DC 24 V (Allowable range DC 20.4 ~ 27.6 V)

Do not perform a dielectric voltage test. Before connecting the power supply to the NB unit, mount the cable on the terminal block. Make the

connection by using terminal screws crimping on a twisted-pair cable with a crimping range of 12~26 AWG, and only 6.5 mm of insulation peel of the cable needs to be peeled off. Tighten the terminal screws at a torque of between 0.3 and 0.5 Nm. Make sure the screws are properly tightened. Do not use the terminal block of NB3Q-TW01B for other models. NB3Q-TW01B has different pin definitions on the terminal block.

To prevent malfunctions caused by noise, ground the Unit correctly. Do not touch the packaging part of the circuit board with your bare hands. Discharge any static

electricity from your body before handling the board. When using the No. 6 pin of the serial communication port COM1 connector for a voltage of DC+5V,

make sure the supply equipments current capacity is below 250mA before using it. The DC+5V voltage output of the NB unit is +5V5%, and the maximum current is 250mA. (The serial communication port COM1 of NB3Q-TW00B and NB3Q-TW01B is unable to output the current.)

Turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting cables. Always keep the connector screws firmly tightened after the communication cable is connected. Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.

Do not place heavy objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so may break the cables. Confirm the safety of the system before turning ON or OFF the power supply, or pressing the reset button. The whole system may stop depending on how the power supply is turned ON or OFF. Turn ON/OFF

the power supply according to the specified procedure. Reset by pressing the reset button, or restart the power supply, once the DIP switch settings are changed. To ensure the systems safety, make sure to incorporate a program that can confirm the normal

functionality of the NB Unit before running the system. Start actual system application only after sufficiently checking screen data, macros and the operation

of the program at the host side. Do not press the touch panel with a force greater than 30 N. Do not use hard or pointed objects to operate or scrub the screen, otherwise the surface of the

screen may be damaged. Confirm the safety of the system before pressing the touch panel. Signals from the touch switches may not be input if the touch switches are pressed consecutively at

high speed. Confirm each input before proceeding to the next one. Do not accidentally press the touch panel when the backlight is not lit or when the display does not

appear. Make sure of the safety of the system before pressing the touch panel. To use numeric input functions safely, always make maximum and minimum limit settings. Before initializing screen data, confirm that existing data is backed up at the NB-Designer.

19

Precautions for Safe Use

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

When changing the password with the screen, do not reset or turn OFF the power supply until writing is finished. Failure to save the password may cause the screen to fail to function.

When using an equipment monitor, confirm the safety of the system before carrying out the following operations: Changing monitor data. Changing operation mode. Forced set/reset. Changing the current value or the set value.

Do not connect a USB connector to any device that is not applicable. When connecting the equipment with the USB HOST connector, make sure the supply equipments

current capacity is below 150mA before using it. The DC+5V voltage output of the NB Unit is +5V5%, and the maximum current is 150mA.

Before connecting a USB connector to a device, make sure that the device is free of damage. Commercially available and the recommended USB HUBs are different from the general

specifications of the NB Unit. The unit may not function well in an environment subject to noise, static electricity. Therefore, when using a USB HUB, employ sufficient noise and static electricity insulation measures, or install it at a site free of noise or static electricity.

While uploading or downloading screen data or system programs, do not perform the following operations that may corrupt the screen data or the system program: Turning OFF the power supply of the NB Unit. Pressing the PTs reset switch.

Dispose of the Units and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply.

Do not dispose the product into a fire. Doing so may cause the damage with the battery or electronic components. Do not apply an impact with the lithium cell, charge it, dispose it into a fire, or heat it. Doing either of

them may cause an ignition or a bursting. When exporting products with lithium primary batteries containing perchlorate at 6ppb or above to or

delivering them through California, USA, the following precautionary measures have to be publicized. Perchlorate material — applicable through special processing. Refer to http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. NB-Series products contain lithium primary batteries. When exporting products containing this kind of batteries to or delivering them through California, USA, label all the product packages as well as the appropriate delivery packages.

Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile solvents, and do not use chemically treated cloths. Do not dispose the Units together with general waste at waste yards. When disposing them, follow

the related local ordinances or rules. Cannot replace the backlight lamp inside the NB Unit. Deterioration over time can cause the touch points to move. Calibrate the touch panel periodically. Water resistance will be lost if the front sheet is torn or is peeling off. Do not use the Unit, if the front

sheet is torn or is peeling off. The rubber packing will deteriorate, shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment.

Inspect the rubber packing periodically. The communication cables of the COM1 and COM2 connectors are not interchangeable. Confirm the pins

of the ports before carrying out communications. (NB3Q-TW00B and NB3Q-TW01B only has COM1.) Periodically check the installation conditions in applications where the PT is subject to contact with oil or water. Do not perform the following operations during the communication of the USB memory:

Turning off the power supply of the NB Unit. Pressing the Reset button on the NB Unit. Removing the USB memory.

Do not use the USB memory in the environment subject to strong vibration.

Precautions for Correct Use

20 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Precautions for Correct Use

Do not install the unit in any of the following locations: Locations subject to severe changes in temperature Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications Locations subject to condensation as the result of high humidity Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to strong shock or vibration Locations outdoors subject to direct wind and rain Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light Locations subject to dust Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to splashing oil or chemicals

Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations: Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong electric field or magnetic field Locations close to power supply lines Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity

Precautions for software: The update, restoration, uninstall and reinstallation of software in running status is prohibited in order to guarantee the correct use of the product.

21

Conformance to EC Directives

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Conformance to EC Directives

NB-Series Programmable Terminals are EMC compliant.

OMRON products are electronic devices that are incorporated in machines and manufacturing installations. OMRON PTs conform to the related EMC Directives (see note) so that the devices and machines into which they are built can more easily conform to EMC Directives. The actual products have been through inspections and are completely in accordance with EMC directives. However, when they are built into customers systems, whether the systems also comply with these Directives is up to the customers for further inspection.

EMC-related performance of OMRON PTs will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the OMRON equipment or control panel. The customer must, therefore, perform final checks to confirm that the overall machine or device conforms to EMC standards.

Note The applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows: EMS (Electromagnetic sensitivity): EN61131-2: 2007 EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN61131-2: 2007

NB-Series Programmable Terminals are EC compliant. Heed the following precautions in order to ensure that the customers overall machine and device conform to EC Directives.

1 The PT must be installed in a control panel.

2 You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply and the DC power supply must have minimal voltage fluctuations and provide a stable output even if the power supply input is interrupted for 10 ms.

3 The PTs conform to the standard EN 61131-2, but radiated emission characteristics (10m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.

4 This is a Class A product (Product for industry purpose). It may cause radio interference in residential areas, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to reduce interference.

Observe the following precaution if you use NB-series Programmable Terminals in Korea.

Class A Device (Broadcasting Communications Device for Office Use) This device obtained EMC registration for office use (Class A), and it is intended to be used in places other than homes. Sellers and/or users need to take note of this.

Concepts

Conformance to EC Directives

Conformance to KC Standards

Related Manuals

22 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Related Manuals

The related manuals are as follows: Devices and Software Manual Name Manual No.

NB series NB Series NB-Designer Operation Manual (This manual) V106 NB Series Setup Manual V107 NB Series Host Connection Manual V108 NB Series Startup Guide V109

PLC SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Operation Manual W462 SYSMAC CP Series CP1H/L CPU Unit Programming Manual W451 SYSMAC CP Series CP1H CPU Unit Operation Manual W450 SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Hardware USERS Manual W479 SYSMAC CP Series CP1E CPU Unit Software USERS Manual W480 SYSMAC CP Series CP1E/CP2E CPU UNIT INSTRUCTIONS REFERENCE MANUAL

W483

SYSMAC CP Series CP1L-EL/EM CPU Unit Operation Manual W516 SYSMAC CP Series CP2E CPU Unit Hardware USERS MANUAL W613 SYSMAC CP Series CP2E CPU Unit Software USERS MANUAL W614 SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-E/-ZE) Installation Guide W302 SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Operation Manual W303 SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) Operation Manual W322 SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual W317 SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual W352 SYSMAC CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual

W353

SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual W356 SYSMAC CS1 Series CS1G/H Operation Manual W339 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units Operation Manual

W336

SYSMAC CJ Series CJ1G/H(-H) CJ1M CJ1G Operation Manual W393 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Manual W394 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series INSTRUCTIONS Reference Manual W340 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Consoles Operation Manual W341 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware USERS Manual W472 SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Software USERS Manual W473 SYSMAC CS/CJ Series CS1W/CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX) Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Networks

W420

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series CS1W/CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX) Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Applications

W421

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series CS1W/CJ1W-EIP21 (100Base-TX) EtherNet/IPTM Units Operation Manual

W465

NJ Series CPU Unit Hardware USERS Manual W500 NJ/NX Series CPU Unit Software USERS Manual W501 NJ/NX Series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IPTM Port USERS Manual W506 NJ/NX Series Troubleshooting Manual W503 NX-Series NX102 CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual W593 NX-Series NX1P2 CPU Unit Hardware Users Manual W578 NX-Series NX1P2 CPU Unit Built-in I/O and Option Board Users Manual W579

Safety Controller G9SP Series Safety Controller OPERATION MANUAL Z922 External Tool CX-Programmer Ver.9. Operation Manual W446

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual W504

1-1NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

1

This section provides an outline of the NB-Series PTs, including their functions, features, connection types and communication methods.

1-1 Functions and Structure of NB-Series PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-1-1 How NB-Series PTs Work at FA Production Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-1-2 Operations of NB-Series PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1-2 Communicating with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-2-1 Whats the Host Link? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-2-2 Connecting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 1-2-3 Communicating with the PLC Manufactured by Other Companies . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1-3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 1-3-1 Connectable Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1-4 Procedures for NB-Series PTs Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Introduction

1 Introduction

1-2 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

1-1 Functions and Structure of NB-Series PTs

The NB-Series Programmable Terminals (PTs) are sophisticated operator interfaces that can indicate information and perform operations as required at FA production sites. This section provides a brief of the roles and performances of the NB Series PTs for beginning users.

Monitoring Line Operating Status The device and operation status of the system can be displayed in real time. Using graphic charts or other allows display data in easy-to-understand format.

Instructing FA Staff PTs can be used to notify system operators if there is a system or device error and to indicate countermeasures and necessary information.

Controlling Panel Switches NB-Series PTs allow the users to create various kinds of switches on the displayed screen. The values allocated to the switches can be sent to the host by clicking the switches.

Transferring Screen Data The screen data displayed on NB-Series PTs is created by using NB-Designer in the PC. The screen data is transferred to the NB units through the USB, Ethernet, and the RS-232C or using USB memory.

Displaying Screens The data to be displayed on the screens is created by using NB-Designer in PC and the data is transferred to the PT. The required screen can be displayed by a command from the host or by operating the touch switches.

1-1-1 How NB-Series PTs Work at FA Production Sites

1-1-2 Operations of NB-Series PTs

USB, Ethernet, RS-232C or USB memory

Screen data

Create screen data.

Only when transferring screen data or using the NB-Designer, the computer can connect with PT.

Computer

(NB-Designer)

Host

The required screens can be displayed by using commands from the host or touch switch operations.

1-3

1 Introduction

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

1-1 Functions and S tructure of

N B

-S eries P

Ts

1

1-1-2 O perations of N

B -S

eries P Ts

Reading Data from the Host NB-Series PTs can be connected to the host by using communication methods such as RS-232C, RS-485, RS-422A, or Ethernet to automatically read the required data from the host.

Sending Data to the Host The data entered from the touch panel (ON/OFF button status, numeric data and character strings) can be sent to the host.

RS232, RS485, RS422, or Ethernet

Host

Host

ON/OFF status, numeric data, etc.

Touch panel

1 Introduction

1-4 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

1-2 Communicating with the Host

With NB-series PTs, data required for display can be accessed and the words and bits where the entered data will be stored can be allocated to any area in the PLC. The operations include the direct reading and writing of the allocated words and bits, the modification of the display status for the functional objects on the PT screen, and the control and report of the PT status.

NB-Series PTs can be connected to the PLC manufactured by OMRON using the Host Link method.

The Host Link is a kind of optimized and economical communication method for FA system, which is applicable to link one PT with one PLC or more. The PC can be used to transfer programs to the PLC, monitor the data area of PLC and control the operation of PLC. The NB-series PTs, however, only support 1:1 communication. Do not connect multiple PLCs with an NB Unit.

In the system using Host Link system, one PT sends Host Link commands to the PLC and the commands’ processing is completed followed by returning the results of the processing by the PLC (the host).

System Features:

Connection method: RS-232C or RS-422A

Transmission rate (baud rate): 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 56000, 57600, 115200 and 187500 bps.

The transmission rates of 14400, 56000 and 187500 bps are not supported by the PLC manufactured by OMRON.

Host monitoring: The PC can be used to transfer or read the PLC programs, and perform reading and writing of the data area of PLC.

Error check system: Both parity and frame check are performed to estimate the errors occurring during all the communications.

1-2-1 Whats the Host Link?

I/O areaDM area

Auxiliary area timers/counters

NB-Series PT PLC

1-5

1 Introduction

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

1-2 C om

m unicating w

ith the H

ost

1

1-2-2 C onnecting M

ethods

RS-232C is a kind of serial physical interface standard formulated by Electric Industry Association (EIA).

RS-232C method is based on 1:1 communication, which is applied to the point-to-point communication within 15-meter distance due to the existence of common-ground noise and the unavoidable common- mode interference etc.

RS-485 uses the differential signal negative logic and the common 2-wire method, and the connectable node on the same bus is up to 32. The master-slave communication method, i.e. one master communicating with multiple slaves, is generally used in the RS-485 communication network.

RS-485 and RS-422A methods can realize 1:N communication, i.e. one host communicating with multiple PLCs or PTs. The maximum number of PLCs or PTs that can be connected to the host is up to 32, and the maximum transmission distance is 500 meters.

RS-485 is half-duplex communication method that cannot allow the transmission and receiving to be performed simultaneously.

It is unnecessary to control the data direction due to 4-wire RS-422A interface using separate transmission and receiving channels. Any necessary signal exchange among the equipments can be performed by using software method (XON/XOFF Handshaking) or hardware method (control wires).

RS-422A standard with its full name Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits specifies the characteristics of the interface circuit. Actually, there is also a signal ground, total 5 wires.

Ethernet is a kind of baseband LAN specification, established by Xerox company and jointly developed by Xerox, Intel and DEC companies, which is the most common communication protocol standard adopted by the existing LANs. PT uses the standard UTP as the transmission media for the Ethernet. The NB Series use UTP cables.

The network communications between PT and PLC can be realized through the Ethernet connection. Connecting the PT and the PLC manufactured by OMRON through the Ethernet allows the data read and written. Whats more, connecting the PT with PC via the Ethernet can also perform the project upload/download and the system processing.

1-2-2 Connecting Methods

RS-232C

RS-485

RS-422A

Ethernet

1 Introduction

1-6 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Besides the connection with the PLC manufactured by OMRON, NB-Series PTs can also communicate with the devices manufactured by SIEMENS, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, Schneider Electric, Ltd., Delta, Panasonic, Allen-Bradley, GE Fanuc Automation Inc., LG and the PLCs supporting Modbus protocol. For the manufacturers and the models of the PLCs that can be communicated with, refer to [NB Series Host Connection Manual].

1-2-3 Communicating with the PLC Manufactured by Other Companies

1-7

1 Introduction

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

1-3 S ystem

C onfiguration

1

1-3-1 C onnectable P

eripheral D evices

1-3 System Configuration

*1 When using USB to connect NB Unit with the computer, please refer to 2-3-2 Connecting by USB in NB Series Setup Manual.

*2 When connecting NB-TW01B and the Host through the Ethernet, the Host should support the Ethernet communications.

1-3-1 Connectable Peripheral Devices

Host

RS-232C cable USB cable *1 Ethernet *2 USB memory

NB Unit

With NB-Designer Software installed

RS-232C cable (15m max.) RS-485/RS422 cable (500m max.) Ethernet *2

PC

Running Windows

1 Introduction

1-8 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

1-4 Procedures for NB-Series PTs Operation

Perform the following procedures to operate the NB-Series PTs.

*1 The system will enter RUN mode after the screen data is input.

*2 System program is installed only under special circumstances, such as when the system program is transformed or repaired.

*3 The system setting mode can be entered by using the DIP SW on the back side.

*4 When the abnormalities occur during the operation, the operations such as checking input/output and confirming the setting state etc can be performed as required.

*5 Use only alphanumerics in a file name of a project file or graphic library and folder where those files are stored. It may cause a compile error when edited in countries except the files origin country.

Host setting

See in the

2-1-2 Installation onto the Operation panel NB Series Setup Manual

See in the

2-1-3 Connecting the Power Supply NB Series Setup Manual

See Section4 Functions of NB Manager

See in the

Section3 System Setting Mode NB Series Setup Manual

See Section3 Functions of NB-Designer

See Section2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

Panel installation

Peripheral connections

Screen creation *5

Screen transfer

See

Power connections

Power ON *1

Kernel and Rootfs installation *2

Transferring to system setting mode *3

Host connections

Operation

System maintenance *4

Settings/com check

Programming

PT connections

Installation on the computer

Host PT NB-Designer

Host link See in the

Connect to other company’s PLC See NB Series Host Connection Manual

2-4 Communication Connections NB Series Setup Manual

3-15 Download

Tranferring to user project mode

2-1NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2

The NB-Designer software needs to be installed on your computer when you use it for the first time. NB-Designer is a kind of application software running in Windows developed by Microsoft Corporation.

2-1 Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-2 Installation/Uninstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-2-1 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-2-2 Uninstallation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-3 Startup & Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2-3-1 Starting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2-3-2 Quitting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2-4 Installation of USB Driver for NB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Installation and Startup of NB- Designer

2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

2-2 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2-1 Before Installation

The system environment to run the NB-Designer is as follows.

System Configuration

Items Minimum Configurations

Operating System (OS) Microsoft Windows XP (SP3 or higher) Microsoft Windows Vista (32-bit or 64-bit edition) Microsoft Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit edition) Microsoft Windows 8 (32-bit or 64-bit edition) Microsoft Windows 8.1 (32-bit or 64-bit edition) Microsoft Windows 10 (32-bit or 64-bit edition)

CPU Intel Pentium II or higher

Memory 512 MB or more

Hard Disk 2.5 GB or more, with the disk space more than 800 MB at least

Display Supports the display with resolution of 800600 and 16-bit high color (1024768 and 32-bit true color are recommended.) . 100% (96DPI) is recommended for Windows Text size (DPI) settings.

RS-232C COM Port One port or more is kept for the serial communication used by the touch panel.

USB Port USB 1.1 or higher

CD-ROM Drive 4x or higher

2-3

2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2-2 Installation/U ninstallation

2

2-2-1 Installation P rocedure

2-2 Installation/Uninstallation

1 Start Windows.

2 Double click [Setup_NBD_V] to perform the installation.

Note For download the application programs, please access your local OMRON website. If local site cannot be found, please access OMRON IA global site http://www.ia.omron.com/ at first and select the area where you are.

3 Select your language to use the program in the [Choose Installation Language] window, and click NEXT.

4 Click the [Next] again to display the [Select the Destination Location] dialog box.

5 After selecting default of the installing location, click the [Next].

6 To select another available location to install, click [Browse]. After a folder list appears, select an available folder to install NB-Designer. Then click the [OK] and followed by [Next].

7 When [Ready to install the program] dialog box appears, click [Install] to start installation.

8 When [InstallShield Wizard is completed] dialog box appears, click [Finish] to complete the installation.

9 Start NB-Designer on Windows other than Windows XP.

If you use NB-Designer on Windows other than Windows XP, NB-Designer is executed with administrator authority.

Perform [Uninstall or change a program] in Windows.

Note When using new-version software to update a project created with software of an old version, backup necessarily the project before update.

Precautions for Correct Use

In order to use the product correctly, when running the software, do not perform definitely update, restoration, uninstallation, and reinstallation.

2-2-1 Installation Procedure

2-2-2 Uninstallation Procedure

2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

2-4 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2-3 Startup & Quit

This section provides a brief for startup and quit of NB-Designer.

Select [Start]-[All Programs]-[OMRON]-[NB-Designer]-[NB-Designer]. The startup can also be realized

by double clicking the shortcut icon on the desktop.

The user should run this program as an administrator in operation system of Windows other than Windows XP.

When the NB-Designer is started for the second time, the project operated last time will be opened automatically.

During the first launch of NB-Designer, the following screen will be displayed.

To quit the NB-Designer can be realized by using any one of the following methods. Select [Exit] in the [File] menu. Click the button in the upper right corner of the main window. Double click the NB-Designer icon in the upper left corner of the main window. Click the NB-Designer icon in the upper left corner of the main window, and select [Close] from the

displayed control menu bar. Press the [Alt] key and [F4] key simultaneously.

Note When the edited data in the file is not saved, Save the Current Project? dialog box will pop up.

2-3-1 Starting Method

2-3-2 Quitting Method

2-5

2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2-4 Installation of U S

B D

river for N B

2

2-4 Installation of USB Driver for NB

Install the USB driver for NB on PC.

After the installation, the data transmission between the PC and the NB Unit is available via USB.

Because the USB driver included in the NB-Designer is certified by Microsoft, it will be installed automatically accompanying with the software installation, so there is no need to install the USB driver by manual again.

Operating procedure

1 After the USB slave for the NB Unit and the computer are connected by the USB cable, Found New Hardware Wizard will be displayed on PC. After selecting [Install the software automatically (Recommended)], click the [Next] button.

2 USB driver is being installed.

2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

2-6 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 After the completion of installation, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Close] button.

When the above-mentioned installation methods dont work.

1 After the USB slave for the NB Unit and the computer are connected by the USB cable, Update Driver Software will be displayed on PC. After selecting [Browse my computer for driver software].

2-7

2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2-4 Installation of U S

B D

river for N B

2

2 The following dialog box is displayed. Select [Include subfolders] and click the [Browse] button to specify the folder.

Specify the driver folder under NB-Designer installation directly and click [Next] button.

3 USB driver is being installed.

2 Installation and Startup of NB-Designer

2-8 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 After the completion of installation, the following dialog box will appear. Click the [Close] button.

You can check whether the USB driver is installed successfully by selecting Computer / Manage / Hardware / Device Manager / Universal Serial Bus controllers location, as shown below.

Additional Information

When USB device is registered as Gadget Serial, it may not be installed automatically. In this case, right-click on the device manager, and select Update Driver Software from the menu, then take this step.

3-1NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 This section describes the functions of NB-Designer.

3-1 User Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3-2 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 3-2-1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 3-2-2 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 3-2-3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 3-2-4 Screen Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 3-2-5 Draw Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 3-2-6 Components Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 3-2-7 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3-2-8 Option Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3-2-9 Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 3-2-10 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

3-3 NB-Designer Software Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 3-3-1 Project Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 3-3-2 Project File Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 3-3-3 Project Work Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 3-3-4 Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 3-3-5 Component List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

3-4 Screen Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 3-4-1 Screen Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 3-4-2 Screen Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 3-4-3 Screen Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 3-4-4 Screen Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 3-4-5 Screen Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 3-4-6 Components Related to Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

3-5 Basic Design Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 3-5-1 Designing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 3-5-2 About ID No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 3-5-3 Additional Comments (Descriptions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 3-5-4 Read/Write Address for PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 3-5-5 Vector Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 3-5-6 Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 3-5-7 Creating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

Functions of NB-Designer

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-2 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5-8 Task Bar and Operation Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70 3-5-9 Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 3-5-10 Basic Properties of Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 3-5-11 Control Setting of Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76 3-5-12 Display Setting of Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

3-6 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82 3-6-1 Bit Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82 3-6-2 Bit Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85 3-6-3 Bit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88 3-6-4 Command Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89 3-6-5 Word Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96 3-6-6 Word Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98 3-6-7 XY Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102 3-6-8 Moving Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111 3-6-9 Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116 3-6-10 Number Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118 3-6-11 Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124 3-6-12 Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127 3-6-13 Text Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131 3-6-14 Level Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132 3-6-15 Analog Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143 3-6-16 Indirect Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147 3-6-17 Direct Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150 3-6-18 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152 3-6-19 Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154 3-6-20 Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164 3-6-21 Oscillograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164 3-6-22 Scroll Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168 3-6-23 Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171 3-6-24 Note Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178 3-6-25 Word Neon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-189 3-6-26 Bit Neon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190 3-6-27 Touch Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-191 3-6-28 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-193 3-6-29 Data History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-194

3-7 Function Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200 3-7-1 Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200 3-7-2 Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201 3-7-3 Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-209 3-7-4 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-213 3-7-5 Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-218 3-7-6 Vector Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-219 3-7-7 Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-220 3-7-8 Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-223 3-7-9 Freeplotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-226 3-7-10 Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-227 3-7-11 Indirect Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-229 3-7-12 User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233 3-7-13 Multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233 3-7-14 Event Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-236

3-3

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3

3-8 Project Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-238 3-8-1 Text Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-238 3-8-2 Variable Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-244 3-8-3 Alarm Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-248 3-8-4 Event Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-253 3-8-5 PLC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-257

3-9 Macro Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-265 3-9-1 Create a Simple Macro Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-265 3-9-2 Macro and Specification of Operation with Read/Write Variables . . . . . . . . 3-272 3-9-3 Macro Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-273 3-9-4 Other Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-276

3-10 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-290 3-10-1 PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-291 3-10-2 Task Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-292 3-10-3 PT Extended Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-294 3-10-4 System Information Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-304 3-10-5 Security Levels Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-306 3-10-6 User Permission Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-308 3-10-7 Event History Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-322 3-10-8 COM1/COM2 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-324 3-10-9 External Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-325 3-10-10 Ethernet Communication Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-327

3-11 Address of System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-328 3-11-1 Local Bit (LB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-329 3-11-2 Local Word (LW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-334 3-11-3 Nonvolatile Local Word (LW10000~10255) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-339 3-11-4 System Information Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-341

3-12 Recipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-343 3-12-1 Process of Creating One Recipe Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-343 3-12-2 Recipe Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-345 3-12-3 Upload/Download of Recipe Data between PT and PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-349

3-13 Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-354

3-14 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-360 3-14-1 Offline test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-360 3-14-2 Direct Online test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-361 3-14-3 Indirect Online test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-362

3-15 Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-363 3-15-1 Transmission Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-363 3-15-2 Download via USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-366 3-15-3 Download to USB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-366 3-15-4 Specification of Downloading Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-366

3-16 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-371

3-17 RecipeEditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-421

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-4 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-1 User Screen

The displayed contents in the screen are shown as below when the NB-Designer is running.

You can also right-click [View] — [Toolbar] or toolbar to see each toolbar shown as below.

Title Editing project file name and others are displayed.

Menu Selects the various kinds of command menus of NB-Designer. After these menus being selected, the corresponding pull-down menu will pop up. Each pull-down menu corresponds to one command operation.

Title Menu

Toolbar

Project Library window

Output window

Component list window

Project Work Space

Status bar

Edit window

Project file window

3-5

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-1 U ser S

creen

3

Toolbar

1 Common Toolbar

Includes some basic tools such as New, Open, Cut and Copy etc.

2 Draw Toolbar

Each image of figure drawing is displayed in icons. The available drawing tools include Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, Sector, Polygon, Text etc.

3 Screen Toolbar

Performs Up/Down operation of the screen.

4 Component Edit Toolbar

Adjusts the position of the component (i.e. top-alignment, bottom-alignment, left-alignment, right-alignment etc), the size, cascading, combination and flip methods.

5 Line Width Toolbar

Adjusts the width of the line in the figure.

6 Line Style Toolbar

Add or delete the arrow head, replace solid line with broken line in the figures.

7 System Toolbar

Performs the compilation, downloading and test of the project.

8 Database Toolbar

Includes text library, alarm information, Variable Table, PLC control and event information.

9 Code Edit Toolbar

The icon to edit macro is displayed.

10 Pattern Toolbar

Select the filling-style of screen background or the closed space such as rectangle, ellipse, sector etc.

11 Label Component Edit Toolbar

Performs the alignments of the label such as label aligning to the left-border/right-border/top- border or bottom-border of the component, label locating in the vertical center or horizontal center of the component.

12 State Switch Toolbar

Simulates the switching of the various states of each component in the current screen and languages.

13 Font Toolbar

Sets dot matrix/vector/graphics mode, font and font size of various kinds of texts displayed in the screen.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-6 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

14 Status Bar Toolbar

Displays the information such as the current mouse position, the width/height of the destination object and the editing state etc.

Project Library Window 6 columns in the Project Library Window are available.

Connector: Selects the communication cable type.

PT: Selects the PT type.

PLC: Selects the PLC type.

Parts: Selects various kinds of configuration parts.

Function Parts: Selects various kinds of multi-function parts.

Project Database: Selects some special functions.

Project Work Space Project Work Space adopts tree view chart to show the relations of the PLC, PT, PT internal screens and components in the whole project.

Project File Window Project File Window adopts tree view to show the correlations between the PT and bitmap files related to the project, and all the information of the files (such as the recipe files, macro files and graphics library files etc) contained in the project.

Output Window For details, refer to 3-3-4 Output Window (Page 3-45).

Component List Window For details, refer to 3-3-1 Project Library Window (Page 3-35).

Configuration and Setup Window, Edit Window Users setup configurations or create drawings in the window.

3-7

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-1 F ile M

enu

3-2 Menus

There are various kinds of menus in NB-Designer. You can set the object, graphics, chart, macro, data block etc, and create the screen data displayed on the NB Unit. The pull-down menu list and the purposes of each item are as follows.

New

Select [New] in the [File] menu or icon to create a new project.

A new project is created when you press [OK] after inputting the project name.

Open

Select [Open] in the [File] menu or icon to open an existing project.

Select the project file to be opened, and press [Open] or double click this project file.

3-2-1 File Menu

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-8 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Import Project/Export Project Select [Export Project] in the [File] menu to save an opened project as a pkg file. Select [Import Project] in the [File] menu to import an existing pkg file.

Save Select either of Save and Save As.

Print Select a project data and open a screen to enable this function. This functionality will allow the user to print screen images.

Click [Print] to open print setup window.

3-9

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-1 F ile M

enu

Select [Print Preview] to display a preview window.

To display the Print Setup window, click [Print Setting].

Close Select [Close] in the [File] menu to close the current project.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-10 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

All the current windows will be closed after Close being pressed, and the display screen is shown as below.

List up the 4 projects opened recently

Exit Exit the NB-Designer software.

Note When Free-editing multiple project screens, adds the multiple-project-simultaneous-opening function, thus making the copy of the component in the editing screens of two projects available.

Additional Information

Operations related to files cannot be executed via networks.

Do not use the system locale-dependent characters for the project file name and folder name.

3-11

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-2 E dit M

enu

Undo The latest operation can be cancelled by using this function, and the screen will return to the state

before this operation. Pressing icon or selecting [Undo] in the [Edit] menu can cancel the latest operation.

Redo Using this function after performing Undo operation can restore the Undo operation done just

now. It just needs to press icon or select [Redo] in the [Edit] menu.

The operations supported by Undo and Redo are as follows.

(1) Dragging a part or a functional part from the Project Library Window

(2) Drawing a component

(3) Moving the object

(4) Adjusting the object size

(5) Performing all the operations with the Component Edit Toolbar

(6) Selecting the line width, line style or arrow

(7) Selecting the object filling style

(8) Selecting the object border color

(9) Selecting the object filled color

(10)Performing Set Top Layer and Set Bottom Layer operations

(11)Performing cut, copy, paste and deletion

3-2-2 Edit Menu

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-12 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

(12)Performing the Repeat operation

An example of operation in which a bit switch component is added to the PT screen and [Undo] or [Redo] is performed to the addition is provided as below.

Press [Undo].

Then press [Redo].

Note The software only supports single-step Undo/Redo operation.

Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete After selecting one component or more, you can cut, copy, paste it or them etc, and the

corresponding icons are shown as .

Nudge The component position can be adjusted by Nudge method after it is selected. The component movement can be realized by using direction key or the corresponding [Nudge] icons. Each time the Nudge button is pressed, the component will move a pixel distance accordingly. The

corresponding icons are shown as and they are Left, Right, Up, Down

corresponding one-to-one with the contents of [Nudge] in the [Edit] menu. The simple nudge method is to use the arrow keys on the keyboard, which realizes the easy component movement.

3-13

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-2 E dit M

enu

Alignment Makes the selected component realize the Left, Right, Top, Bottom, Vertical Midline or Horizontal

Midline alignment. The corresponding icons are shown as Here only take

Left as an example with the effect shown as below.

Size To make the multiple components with the same width, height or size, you just need to press the corresponding icons for adjusting the size of the component, or to select the options in the

corresponding menus. The corresponding icons are shown as and they are Width,

Height and Both respectively. Unify the size for all components according to the size of the component is located in the left end among all the components. If you want to specify a certain component as the reference, select other components after pressing the [shift] key to select the reference.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-14 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Order When the multiple components are overlapped together, you can use the icons shown as

(Bring to Front, Send to Back, Bring Forward, Send Backward) or select [Bring to

Front], [Send to Back], [Bring Forward], [Send Backward] in [Order] of the [Edit] menu to change the display order of the components.

Firstly select the component and set the layer of the component by pressing the corresponding icon. The component in the front layer is always displayed above that in the back layer.

Group/UnGroup This function is used to make the multiple selected components or graphics combined together as a separate component. To make multiple components combined together, it just needs to select these

components, and then select [Group] in the [Edit] menu or press icon. To cancel the

combination, it only needs to select this combined component, then select [UnGroup] in the [Edit]

menu or press icon.

Horizontal Even Spacing This function is used to make the horizontal space between the multiple selected components or graphics same. Select the graphics or components to be operated, and then select [Horizontal Even Spacing] in the [Edit] menu or press icon. Clicking the icon allows the components lined as

below.

Vertical Even Spacing This function is used to make the vertical space between the multiple selected components or graphics same. Select the graphics or components to be operated, and then select [Vertical Even Spacing] in the [Edit] menu or press icon.

Set Top Layer

3-15

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-2 E dit M

enu

Align Horizontal Center This function is used to make the multiple selected components or graphics located in the horizontal center of the Edit Window. Firstly select the components or graphics to be operated, and then select [Align Horizontal Center] in the [Edit] menu or press icon, as shown below.

Align Vertical Center This function is used to make the multiple selected components or graphics located in the vertical center of the Edit Window. Firstly select the graphics to be operated, and then select [Align Vertical Center] in the [Edit] menu or press icon.

Flip

Only shapes (such as line, circle, polygon etc) drawn by drawing tools rather than other components can be flipped. Firstly select the graphics to be operated, and then select [Flip Horizontally], [Flip

Vertically, [Rotate 90 Degree] in the [Edit] menu or select the corresponding icons to

flip the components.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-16 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Reset Toolbars When the toolbar is moved to the other position, it can be restored to the default position by clicking this option, as shown below.

The options in the [View] menu are used to control the various kinds of toolbars to be displayed or not.

3-2-3 View Menu

3-17

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-3 V iew

M enu

Common Toolbar The correspondences of all the items (i.e. the icons here) in the standard toolbar to the options in the menus are shown as below.

[New Project]: To create a new project

[Open Project]: To open an existing project

[Save Project]: To save the current project

[Cut]: To perform cutting operation

[Copy]: To perform copy operation

[Paste]: To perform paste operation

[Repeat]: To perform Repeat operation

[Delete]: To delete the component

[Redo]: To restore the latest cancelled operation

[Undo]: To cancel the latest operation procedure

[Find/Replace]: To search the memory addresses used in the current project, screen or macro and perform the replacement

[Print Preview]: To preview the print effect

[Print]: To print

[Property]: To show the object Properties

[Display Name]: To display/hide the components name

[Display PLC]: To display/ hide the component’s PLC name

[Display Address]: To display/hide the component’s address

[About]: To describe the version information of NB-Designer

Display Name

Display PLC

About

Print

Display Address

Property

Print Preview

Find/Replace

UnDo Paste

Repeat

Delete

ReDo

New Project

Open Project

Copy

Cut

Save Project

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-18 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Repeat With this function, one component can become multiple components through the copy operation,

thus saving a lot of time. You can make the multiple components available by clicking icon or right-clicking [Repeat] in the corresponding menu after the component being selected, as shown below.

Copy Type: Selecting [From start point], the copied component to be arranged according to the upper left top of the component as the reference point. Selecting [From end point], the copied component to be arranged according to the lower right top of the component as the reference point.

Copy Quantity: The number of the copied component in each line and each column.

Interval between components: Specifying the horizontal interval and vertical interval between the two of the copied components.

Offset Address: The address of the copied component increases/decreases in X, Y directions.

Word Address Auto Change: The word address of the copied component increases/decreases in X, Y directions.

Bit Position Auto Change: The bit address of the copied component increases/decreases in X, Y directions.

Interval: To select the address increment among the copied components.

[Property]: When changing the property of the components, select and double-click the component

which is necessary to change the property. Also clicking the icon and displaying [Property] dialog box allow the property of the component edited.

3-19

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-3 V iew

M enu

Database Toolbar The correspondences of all the items (i.e. the icons here) in the toolbar to the options in the menus are shown as below.

[Text Library]: To register the text string for the labels.

[Variable Table]: To register the variable information

[Alarm Setting]: To memory the alarm information

[Event Setting]: To memory the event information

[PLC Control]: To register the PLC control configurations

[Add Graphics]: To create the new bitmap or Vector Graphics

[Import Graphics]: To import the bitmap or Vector Graphics

[Sound Library]: To add the audio file (The NB Series does not support the function.)

[Add Macro]: To add the Macro

[Import Recipe Data File]: To import the recipe file

[Edit Logo Screen]: Click this button to make the screen switch to the logo edit screen. therefore you can make modification or editing the logo screen displayed when the PT is powered on, as shown below.

Line Style Toolbar Adding or deleting the arrow head or replacing solid line with broken line.

PLC Control

Event Setting

Add Graphics

Sound library

Add Macro

Edit Logo Screen

Import Recipe Data File

Import Graphics

Alarm Setting

Variable Table

Text library

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-20 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Component Edit Toolbar

[Nudge Left]: To make the component move left by 1 grid

[Nudge Right]: To make the component move right by 1 grid

[Nudge Up]: To make the component move up by 1 grid

[Nudge Down]: To make the component move down by 1 grid

[Align Left]: To make the multiple components left-aligned

[Align Right]: To make the multiple components right-aligned

[Align Top]: To make the multiple components top-aligned

[Align Bottom]: To make the multiple components bottom-aligned

[Align Horizontal Midline]: To make the multiple components horizontal-midline-aligned

[Align Vertical Midline]: To make the multiple components vertical-midline-aligned

[Equal Width]: To make the multiple components with the same width

[Equal Height]: To make the multiple components with the same height

[Equal Size]: To make the multiple components with the same size

[Bring to Front]: To bring the component to top layer

[Send to Back]: To send the component to bottom layer

[Bring Forward]: To bring the selected component to previous layer

[Send Backward]: To send the selected component to next layer

[Group]: To make the multiple components combined together

[UnGroup]: To cancel the combination of the multiple components

[Horizontal Even Spacing]: Arranging the multiple components in a horizontal row with equal interval each by the middle point as reference point.

[Vertical Even Spacing]: Arranging the multiple components in a vertical row with equal interval each by the middle point as reference point.

[Align Horizontal Center]: To make the center(s) of one component or multiple components located in the horizontal center of the PT Edit area

[Align Vertical Center]: To make the center(s) of one component or multiple components located in the vertical center of the PT Edit area

[Flip Horizontally]: To perform horizontal flip

[Flip Vertically]: To perform vertical flip

[Rotate 90 Degree]: To rotate the component 90 degree clockwise

[Lock Position]: To lock the position of the component

Label Component Edit Toolbar

Click the component, and then click the label displayed later to select it. Later when you see the label is not gray any more, you can set the position of the label as required (e.g. Left Label, Right Label, Top Label, Bottom Label, Vertical Middle Label and Horizontal Middle Label).

3-21

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-3 V iew

M enu

Draw Toolbar

The contents of the items in the Draw Toolbar are shown as below.

[Select]: To select one component or multiple components

[Line]: To draw a line

[Arc]: To draw an arc

[Rect]: To draw a rectangle

[Round Rect]: To draw a rounded rectangle

[Polyline]: To draw a consecutive line

[Polygon]: To draw a polygon

[Ellipse]: To draw a circle or ellipse

[Sector]: To draw a sector

[Text]: To add the text

[Load Graphic]: To add the bitmap in the editing window

[Frame Color]: To set the frame color for the shapes

[Background Color]: To set the background color for the shapes

[Show Grid]: To make the grid displayed in the screen

[Transparent Color]: To add transparency to the added bitmap

[Multicolor-Grayscale Switch]: To make the transformation between the color and black/white

[Align with Grid]: After the component being selected, click this button once to make the grid point as the moving unit, and click it twice to restore the default pixel point as the moving unit of the component.

For the color setup, there are 40 kinds of colors available, as shown below.

Besides the 40 kinds of colors shown above, the custom colors are also available. The following dialog box will be displayed after clicking Custom Color at the bottom.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-22 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Here you can select any color you want to have. In addition, there are also several color Properties, as shown below, available to you.

Select Component The selection methods of the components are as follows.

(1) Direct selection: The component can be selected by using the mouse directly to click it. (2) Selecting all the components: All the components in the current screen can be selected by

using [Select All] in the [Edit] menu. (3) The multiple components can be selected by clicking them consecutively while pressing the

[Shift] key.

Note The copy operation can be performed by clicking the component to be copied while pressing the [Ctrl] key.

Modify Component Size The modification of the component size can be made by clicking the component. The specific method is as follows: select any one of the eight green points on the component, as shown below, after the component being selected, and then drag it by using the mouse.

Note The white dots displayed on the component mean that the text is selected. If you should change the size of component, click the area without a text to select whole the component.

Fill Component and Frame To change the frame or the background color of the shapes, it just needs to click the small arrow

behind the Frame Color icon after the component being selected to change the frame color,

and to click the small arrow displayed in the right to the [Background Color] icon change the background color of the shapes, as shown below.

3-23

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-3 V iew

M enu

Text

After the text icon being pressed, the text dialog box will pop up, as shown below.

Message: Enter the text which will be displayed on the component. You can use the Enter key to break the input text.

Graphic Font: The font and its size and style etc can be modified in this mode. The Modify dialog box, as shown below, can be entered by clicking the Font on the right side of Graphic Font.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-24 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Transport Font: In this mode, both Vector Font and Bitmap Font can be used, and the font size, alignment method or color etc can be changed.

Load Graphic

The icon can be used to add the graphic when you create a new bitmap. For the creation of the bitmap, refer to 3-5-6 Bitmap (Page 3-65).

Screen Toolbar

[Add Screen]: To add the Edit Window

[Delete Screen]: To delete the current Edit Window

[Current Screen Property]: To display the Properties of the current Edit Window

[Previous Page]: The previous Edit Window

[Current Page]: The title of the current Edit Window

[Next Page]: The next Edit Window

[Magnify]: To magnify in the current Edit Window

[Zoom]: 100%, 200%, and 300% available

[Dwindle]: To dwindle the current Edit Window

[1:1]: The current Edit Window displayed in 100%

Line Style Toolbar

They are used for the selection of line width

1p

2p

3p 4p

5p

6p

7p

8p

3-25

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-3 V iew

M enu

System Toolbar

[Compile]: To only compile the parts with changes in the current project and to check whether there is an error or not. The project must be compiled before the download or test. otherwise the download or test will fail.

[Recompile]: To recompile the items in the current project

[Clear Compiled Result]: To clear the result of the current project

[Download]: To download the project into PT

[Transmission Setting]: To set the transmission method. Either of the Ethernet, USB port, or serial port can be set.

[Offline test]: To perform offline test of the project

[Indirect Online test]: To perform online test of the project indirectly

[Direct Online test]: To perform online test of the project directly

[Decompile]: To decompile the project

Code Edit Toolbar

[New Bookmark]: To create a new bookmark

[Next Bookmark]: To check the next bookmark

[Previous Bookmark]: To check the previous bookmark

[Delete Bookmark]: To delete the bookmark

[Macro Variable Table]: To open or close the Macro Variable Table

Status Bar Toolbar

Displays the information such as the current mouse position, the width/height of the destination object and editing state etc.

Pattern Toolbar

Select one fill effect among various styles as above to set to the drawing components or Edit Window.

Next Bookmark Delete Bookmark

Macro

Variable Table

Previous Bookmark

New Bookmark

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-26 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

In order to set the fill effect to the displayed window, double-click the window and check Use Background Color in the displayed Screen Property, as shown below.

Then select the pattern color and the background color as well as the fill effect you want, as shown below.

In order to add fill effect to the shapes, select the shape to add fill effect and select the fill effect. The procedure to set the fill effect is the same as the one for adding fill effect to the PT. But when setting the fill effect to the components, [Pattern Color] is applied to the outline color and [Background color] is applied to the component’s color. The parameters set to the shape is reflected as below.

3-27

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-4 S creen M

enu

The corresponding contents in the [Screen] menu shown as below have been described in [3-2-3 View Menu], here only the function of [Copy/Delete Screen] and [Save Screen Image] are described in details.

Copy/Delete Screen

Click [Screen][Copy/Delete Screen], and the following dialog box will be displayed.

Operation Type (1) Copy Screen

It can be one or more and its range is between 1 and 999.

Copy Single Screen

When the number is 1, both the starting source screen ID and the starting destination screen ID can be set, which means the screen and Properties of the source screen will be copied into the destination screen.

If the destination screen doesnt exist, the screen with a specified number will be created automatically after the copy operation. And if the destination screen exists already, Copy error: the destination screen ID already exists! will prompt.

3-2-4 Screen Menu

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-28 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

When the number is greater than 1, both the starting source screen ID and the starting destination screen ID can be set, and the destination screen ID will increase automatically according to the copied number in this case, which means the screen and Properties of the source screen will be copied into the screens between the starting destination screen and the end destination screen respectively.

Copy Multi-Screens

When the number is 1, both the starting source screen ID, the end source screen ID and the starting destination screen ID can be set, and the end destination screen ID will increase automatically according to the number of the source screen, which means the screens and properties of the screens between the starting source screen and the end source screen will be copied in order into the screens between the starting destination screen and the end destination screen respectively.

When the copy number is greater than 1, the starting source screen ID, the end source screen ID and the starting destination screen ID can be set, and the end destination screen ID will increase automatically according to the copied number and the number of the source screen, which means the screens and properties of the screens between the starting source screen and the end source screen will be copied in order and as specified number into the screens between the starting destination screen and the end destination screen respectively.

Copy and Paste to Other Project

Screens of a project can be copied and pasted to other project by specifying the project in [Project]. Copied screens are pasted to the destination project given the screen numbers which begin with the next number of the last screen number.

Note The destination screen ID must be a new screen ID because the existing screen ID doesnt support the screen copy.

(2) Delete Screen

Supports single-screen deletion or multiple-screen deletion.

Delete Single Screen

The starting screen ID can be set, which means to delete the screen with this ID.

Delete Multi-Screens

Both the starting screen ID and the end screen ID can be set, which means to delete the screens with the ID between the starting ID and the end ID.

3-29

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-4 S creen M

enu

The following example is only for the multiple-screen copying.

We want to copy Frame 6, Frame 7 and Frame 8 into Frame 11, Frame 12, and Frame 13.

Note 1 The copy of screens is available within the same project or the same PT.

2 When the multiple screens are operated, the copying and deletion among the non-continuous screens are not supported.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-30 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Save Screen Image Select a project data and open a screen to enable this function.

Click [Screen] — [Save Screen Image] , then the dialog box below appears to save the screen images.

Screen Range Specify the screen area to save to a file. Select [All] to save all screens. Click [Specify], then the field [From] and [To] are enabled. Specify the range to save.

Output Folder Designate a folder to save the file. The folder where the project data is stored is specified by default.

A screen image data is saved as bitmap file to the designated folder.

3-31

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-5 D raw

M enu

The corresponding contents in the [Draw] menu shown as below have been described in 3-2-3 View Menu (Page 3-16).

For the corresponding contents in the [Components] menu shown as below, refer to 3-6 Parts (Page 3- 82), 3-7 Function Parts (Page 3-200) and 3-8 Project Database (Page 3-238).

3-2-5 Draw Menu

3-2-6 Components Menu

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-32 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

For the corresponding contents in the [Tools] menu shown as below, refer to 3-12 Recipe Data (Page 3-343), 3-14 Test (Page 3-360) and 3-15 Download (Page 3-363).

The corresponding contents in [Option] menu shown as below have been described in 3-2-3 View Menu (Page 3-16).

3-2-7 Tools Menu

3-2-8 Option Menu

3-33

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-2 M enus

3

3-2-9 W indow

M enu

Software option: Sets operation of NB-Designer.

Copy Macro: Macros can be copied and pasted to other project. Copied macros are pasted to the destination project given the macro numbers which begin with the next number of the last macro number.

Change System Language: used for changing the system language of the software tool.

The corresponding contents in the [Window] menu are as follows.

3-2-9 Window Menu

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-34 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

The horizontally-tile window is shown as below.

The vertically-tile window is shown as below.

The corresponding items in the [Help] menu are shown as follows.

3-2-10 Help Menu

3-35

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-3 N B

-D esigner S

oftw are W

indow

3

3-3-1 P roject Library W

indow

3-3 NB-Designer Software Window

NB-Designer has quite a few windows, which will be illustrated in this part.

When starting the NB-Designer, you will see Project Library Window, Project File Window, and Project Work Space shown as below. For the concept of the screen, the brief will be provided in 3-4 Screen Concept (Page 3-47).

The Project Library Window contains: Connector, PT, PLC, Parts, Function Parts and Project Database.

Connector: Serial Port, Ethernet

PT: NB3Q-TW00B, NB3Q-TW01B, NB5Q-TW00B, NB5Q-TW01B…

PLC: OMRON, SIEMENS, MITSUBISHI, Schneider

Parts: Bit Button, Bit Switch, Word Lamp, Data Log, XY Graph, Number Input, Text Input

Function Parts: Scale, Function Key, Alarm Display, Timer

Project Database: Text Library, Variable Table, PLC Control

3-3-1 Project Library Window

Project File Window

Project Work Space

Project Library Window

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-36 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Directions:

1 Connector

Just click Serial Port, and drag it to the Project Work Space.

2 PT

Check your PT type, find and drag the PT with the same type in the PT to the Project Work Space.

3 PLC

Check your PLC type, find and drag the PLC with the same type in the PLC to the Project Work Space.

After finishing selection of the PLC, PT and Connector, carry out connection. The connection method is as follows: move the locations of PT and PLC accordingly, or click one end of the connection line and drag it to the vicinity of the COM port of the PLC or the PT, then bring the connection port close to either end of the connection line, and a successful connection can be completed.

Note If the PLC or PT is not dragged into the Project Work Space, both of the Project File Window and Project Work Space will be empty, as shown below.

PT and Graphics are empty

PT and PLC is empty

3-37

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-3 N B

-D esigner S

oftw are W

indow

3

3-3-1 P roject Library W

indow

Once the PLC and PT are dragged in, the Project File Window and Project Work Space will be filled with appropriate content, as shown below:

4 Parts

These include various editing components, as shown below:

When a project is created, and the Edit Window is entered, it just needs to drag the required components to the Edit Window.

As to the usage methods of the components, refer to 3-6 Parts (Page 3-82).

PT with appropriate contents

PT and PLC with appropriate contents

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-38 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

In the Project Library Window, you can right-click, select and use Small Icon, as shown below.

5 Function Parts

These include Scale, Function Key, Alarm Display, Timer, etc. For details, refer to 3-7 Function Parts (Page 3-200).

6 Project Database

This contains Text Library, Variable Table, Alarm Information, Event Information and PLC Control. For details, refer to 3-8 Project Database (Page 3-238).

3-39

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-3 N B

-D esigner S

oftw are W

indow

3

3-3-2 P roject F

ile W indow

The Project File Window is intended for displaying information about the PT, Macro, Recipe and Vector Graphic, etc. contained in a project. If this project uses 1 PT, only one HMI0.whe will appear below the [PT]. if 3 PTs are involved, HMI0.whe, HMI1.whe, HMI2.whe will appear accordingly. The rest can be deducted from this. See the following diagram.

By clicking the + or — symbol on the left of the icon, the folder tree can be unfolded or folded.

By double-clicking a specific file, the editing state can be entered.

Note The recipe file (.RCP) can only be imported and deleted, but not be edited in the Edit Window.

Graphics

The Graphics mainly indicates this project contains how many Vector Graphics and bitmaps. If a new Vector Graphics or bitmap is created in this project, it will show up immediately here. If a created Vector Graphics or bitmap is double-clicked, the screen will be switched to the graphics edit window immediately. For Vector Graphics and bitmaps, refer to 3-5-5 Vector Graphic (Page 3-60) and 3-5-6 Bitmap (Page 3-65).

The Project Work Space is mainly intended for displaying the structure of the project, and contains two parts: PT and PLC, as shown below.

3-3-2 Project File Window

3-3-3 Project Work Space

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-40 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

And the schematic diagram is shown as below.

PT It mainly displays (stores) the PT used in the project, each of which also has a subfolder. Every folder stores its own structure.

PLC It mainly displays (stores) the number of PLC, PLC No. and Station No. addresses used in the project.

Note Creating a new project for each PT is recommended.

Tree View

All the components contained in each screen will be displayed here, and if there is no component in a screen, nothing will appear below it.

By clicking the + or — symbol on the left of icon, the folder tree can be unfolded or folded. Directly double-click the Screen or the component No. in the Screen to skip to the edit page involving the component. When a Screen or component is selected, pressing the DELETE button can delete the related screen or component.

Project Name

Screen 0

Screen 1

Screen n

Part 0

PLC

PLC 0

HMI 0HMI

PLC 1

PLC n

Part 1

Part n

3-41

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-3 N B

-D esigner S

oftw are W

indow

3

3-3-3 P roject W

ork S pace

Explanation about the characters on the top of the PLC Property window.

The first digit indicates the PLC No. currently used.

The second digit indicates the Station No. of PLC currently used.

Screens Preview Click [Screens Preview] in the [Project Work Space] to display the preview of the corresponding screen. This makes browsing the thumbnails quite conveniently.

PLC and PT replacement Supporting PLC Model Replacement

Note PLC replacement must be carried out through the [Change PLC Model] option. If you do not use this function and delete all the settings of PLC to reconnect with the new PLC, the PLC area is replaced with all the local addresses of PT.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-42 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

It provides a parameter setting dialog box for the PLC to be replaced and other PLCs in the navigation mode for the user to make replacement operation. Select a PLC and right-click it in the Configuration and Setup Window to make the pull-down menu popup, and then click Change PLC Model.

Then, the Change PLC Model dialog box will pop up, as shown below.

A dialog box as shown above will pop up automatically, and all the supported PLC names are included in the pull-down list of the PLC names. When the user select a PLC, the memory address types supported by this PLC will be added to the address type box. The default selections are LB & LW, but the user can select different address types according to the specific PLC. After being confirmed by the user, the PLC will be replaced, and the corresponding PLC memory address in the project will also be replaced at the same time.

Note The function does not support the replacement from the unit type of the Ethernet connections to the unit type of the serial connections.

3-43

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-3 N B

-D esigner S

oftw are W

indow

3

3-3-3 P roject W

ork S pace

An example of setting addresses for [Current PLC] and [New PLC] are as follows.

Supporting PT Model Replacement

Note PT replacement must be carried out through the [Change PT Model] option. If you do not use this function and delete all the settings of PLC to reconnect with the new PLC, the PLC area is replaced with all the local addresses of PT.

When the PT needs to be replaced, you can select the PT by right-clicking it in the Configuration and Setup Window, and select Change PT Model in the pop-up menu.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-44 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

The following dialog box will pop up automatically.

Here, the name and descriptions of the Current PT cannot be altered, while the pull-down box of the New PT lists all the supported [PT type], and the descriptions displayed at the lower part will be updated automatically according to the type selected by the user. After being confirmed, the PT will be replaced, and all the size of graphics in the PT will zoom automatically according to the resolution of the screen.

After the PT is replaced, the original user edit screen will be adjusted by related scales according to the difference of the resolution of various types. All the components with screen display will adjust automatically. For example, all the components (such as the bitmaps, Vector Graphics, button and lamp, etc.) with location and size adjustments can all change their sizes automatically. However, note that there are a few exceptions: as the font size of text strings and label cant be changed, the components using text strings and label will be restricted to mainly display the text in the minimum display area when size changes, especially when it becomes smaller as square components like the Analog Meter change sizes in a square way, the changed sizes may disrupt the proportion among the component sizes, therefore it requires a second fine-adjustment by the user.

By the [Special screen settings] in the dialog box, the special screen which will be replaced to Replace PT is set. If the [Special screen settings] is not used, the special screen of the Current PT will continue to be used.

If the resolutions of the Current PT and New PT are the same, no adjustment is required. But on the contrary, if they are different, it will require the user to adjust the fonts and pictures to appropriate sizes.

3-45

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-3 N B

-D esigner S

oftw are W

indow

3

3-3-4 O utput W

indow

The Output Window mainly displays compilation information of the project so that the user can precisely pinpoint where errors lie, as shown below.

When the project is opened, the Output Window will display the loaded information of the project. when the project is compiled, the Output Window will display the compilation process and error information.

Clearance/Export of Message The compiled information can be cleared or exported in the Output Window. Right-click the mouse in the [Output Window], the following menu will pop up.

Clear Message: All the information in the Output Window will be removed.

Export Message: All the contents in the Output Window are exported to the folder which contains the current project, forming a file named log.txt.

3-3-4 Output Window

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-46 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

If the [Component List Window] is selected from the [View] menu, the Component list window will pop up.

This window displays all the component information used by the project, including PT No., Screen, Component’s Name, Read PLC, Read Address, Write Address, Functional Address etc. Double-click an item to reveal the Properties of the selected component, and the Edit Window will skip to the screen where this component locates.

3-3-5 Component List Window

3-47

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-4 S creen C

oncept

3

3-4-1 S creen Types

3-4 Screen Concept

The project of the NB-Designer is composed of multiple screens. There are 3 types of screen, i.e. Base Screen, Common Sheet and Menu Screen. The Base Screen after its size is changed can also be used as Pop-up Screen. All the screen can be used as the Sheet Screen.

Base Screen This is the common-type screen. When Base Screen is switched by using Screen switching command, the current screen will be cleared (All the screen rather than Common Sheet and Menu Screen will be cleared.), and Base Screen to be switched to will be displayed in the current screen. When the component in Base Screen calls the pop-up screens out, the original information in Base Screen will be reserved, and the called pop-up screen will be attached to the current Base Screen. The master-slave relationship is between Base Screen and all of related pop-up screens. When Base Screen N is switched to Base Screen M, all of the sub-screens of Base Screen N will be closed while Base Screen M and its sub-screens will be displayed. Base Screen must cover the whole screen.

Menu Screen Menu Screen is the screen called by pressing the button of Menu Screen while the task-bar is displayed, and it will be always displayed in the screen until the operation button makes it hidden. Therefore, it can be used to put screen-switching button or some other common components. The default Menu Screen is Frame 2. When the other screen is set as Menu Screen, the size of that screen must be same as that of Menu Screen.

Common Sheet Common Sheet will always be displayed in the screen, and the components to be displayed forever can be put in Common Sheet. In this way, you can see the state of this component or operate this component at any time. The default Common Sheet is Frame 1. You can use [Change Common Sheet] function key to switch the other screen as the current Common Sheet, but only one screen can be used as the current Common Sheet.

Sheet Screen 3 Sheet Screens (max.) can be set for the screen in [Screen Property] dialog box. Sheet Screen is generally used to put some common components such as background graphics, charts and titles and so on for the multiple components. Each screen can be set as Sheet Screen.

3-4-1 Screen Types

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-48 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

As shown above, Sheet Screen can be selected directly from the [Sheet Screen] option. Sheet Screen is different from the general screen. The components in Sheet Screen will be inserted into the general screen during the running, and in fact Sheet Screen isnt displayed at all, but the display and control of its components are similar to that of the components in the general screen.

The Relationship of Screen One screen can include Common Sheet, Base Screen and Menu Screen while one Common Sheet or Base Screen can include many pop-up screens. And the relationship between them is shown as below.

When the screen-switching command is executed, the PT will clear the current screen (the pop-up screen attached on the current screen etc included) and switch to the screen to be displayed, but Common Sheet will always be displayed in the screen. The original contents of Base Screen cant be changed by the pop-up screen that called by the direct screen or indirect screen, and the pop-up screen is just attached to Base Screen. In addition, up to 3 sheet screens can be set for each screen in screen property setup.

When one Base Screen (Screen No. is 0 or ranges from 10 to 32767) is called out, all the components in this screen will be displayed in the PT. If Base Screen has the Sheet Screen, all the components defined in its Sheet Screen will be displayed. All of the Touch Trigger components (such as Bit Button, Function Key etc.) defined in the Sheet Screen are valid in the current screen. If there are display components in Common Sheet, they will be displayed in the current screen. And all the Touch Trigger components defined in Common Sheet are valid.

Each project includes 32768 screens (max.) (Base Screen, Common Sheet and Menu Screen etc included), and only one screen can be used as Menu Screen. But you can use [Change Menu Screen] function key to make the screen switch to the specified screen as Menu Screen. For details, refer to 3-7-2 Function Key (Page 3-201).

Each new project has a default initial screen, and the default screen No. is 0 (If you want to change it, you just need to make changes in [PT Property] in project editing screen.). The valid screen No. ranges from 0 to 32767.

Base Screen Common Sheet S

h eet S

creen 1,2,3

P o

p -u

p screen

1,2,3

P o

p -u

p screen

1,2,3

S h

eet S creen

1,2,3

Menu Screen

Screen

3-49

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-4 S creen C

oncept

3

3-4-1 S creen Types

The default Common Sheet and Menu Screen for the project are Frame 1 and Frame 2. If you want to change the default Menu Screen and Common Sheet, you just need to double click PT to modify [PT Extended Property], as shown below:

Note 1 16 pop-up screens can be opened simultaneously.

2 More than two of the same screens cannot be called from one screen simultaneously. Therefore you cant open the same screen by using 2 direct (indirect) screens in the Base Screen.

3 The screens closed by the function keys cant close the Direct Screen or Indirect Screen, because the opening or closing of Direct Screen is related to the ON/OFF status of bit address that controls the Direct Screen, while the opening and closing of Indirect Screen is just related to the data content of the word address that controls the Indirect screen. The screen closed by the function keys cant change the values of these bits (words) addresses, so it cant close these screens mentioned above.

4 All the Pop-up Screens are attached to the current Base Screen, so when the current screen is closed (or switched to the other Base Screen), the attached Pop-up Screen will be closed. In this case, if the screen is switched back to this Base Screen, you will find that the Pop-up Screens originally attached to this Base Screen still exist (Otherwise there are commands sent to close them.)

5 Base Screen must cover the whole screen.

6 Every Pop-up Screen belongs to the screen where the component ejecting them locates, and master- slave relationship is between them. Therefore, the screen opened by the component in Common Sheet will always be displayed until Common Sheet closes it again.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-50 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

The methods to change the screen property: Double-click the area in which no components are arranged in the screen.

Do not click the components in the screen and click the icons of tool bar.

Title Assign the unique name for each screen for convenient differentiation. Of course, the screen title can be changed.

Screen No. Screen No. range is from 0 to 32767. When a new screen is created, automatically is assigned a Screen No. Screens from 0 to 10 are fixed. The screen No. of the other screens can be changed by the user. Screen No. can be not consecutive.

Position When the screen is the screen ejected by using Pop-up Screen function of the function key, the vertex in the upper-left of the screen will be displayed in this position.

Width and Height Width and height can be set for the Pop-up Screen, and if it is the Base Screen, it must be set to the default size (i.e. the size of the full screen).

Screen Attribute Keyboard page determines whether to set the screen as Keyboard Screen. Print page can be used to set the size of this screen regardless of the limitation of the actual resolution of the PT. The NB Series does not support [Print page].

Protect key mapping on common sheet screen The NB Series does not support this function.

Switching to the lowest security level when screen closed If the security level is set for one screen to realize the function, i.e. the password will be cleared automatically when the screen is closed, and the password needs to be input again when the screen is entered again, the security level will become 0 only if the screen is closed.

3-4-2 Screen Property

3-51

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-4 S creen C

oncept

3

3-4-2 S creen P

roperty

Background Color If the filling effects for the screen are needed, select this option.

Pattern Color and Background Color The selected [Pattern Color] is applied as outline color and the selected [Background Color] is applied as ground color. (For details, refer to the descriptions of Fill Style Toolbar in 3-2-3 View Menu (Page 3-16)). In the default settings, the [Pattern style] is set to 0 so that only the background color is displayed by this setting.

Pop-up Screen Type The types are Tracking, Modal, Clipping and Fixed.

The above parameters show the relationship between one Pop-up Screen and its adjacent screen. If one Pop-up Screen features Modal, the location of parent screen will be frozen after it pops up, and the pop-up screen will always be displayed in the Top layer. If one Pop-up Screen features Clipping, the border of this screen will be restricted by its parent screen, i.e. the part displayed out of the border of its parent screen will be cut off. If one Pop-up Screen features Tracking, it will move together when its parent screen moves.

Note If Clipping is selected, Tracking must be selected simultaneously.

The following Screen A and Screen B are both attached to the Base Screen. Generally, Screen A will be displayed in the Top layer when it is touched. But if Fixed is selected for Screen A, it will not be displayed in the Top layer even if it is touched, but it will always be attached to its parent screen.

Note The screen No. cant be changed once it is created, but the name, frame and background can be changed still.

Security Level Set the corresponding security level for the screen. For details, refer to 3-13 Security Level (Page 3- 354).

Sheet Screen Set the corresponding Sheet Screens for the current screen. The screen to be set as the Sheet Screen must be the created screen, where the components used by the multiple screens together can be put.

Frame Refers to the frame recommended to be used by the Pop-up Screen. The width of the frame can be any number from 0 to 16. If the width is not 0, the color can be selected for the frame.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-52 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Transparency It is only valid for the Pop-up Screen and the Menu Screen.

Example of transparency of Pop-up Screen

Placing one function key to [Pop-up screen] Frame 10 with the property in Frame 0, as shown below. When the transparency is 0%.

Set the width and height of Frame 10 to 200 each, the [Background color] to Yellow, and the [Transparency] to 0%, as shown below.

Perform the offline test, as shown below.

3-53

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-4 S creen C

oncept

3

3-4-2 S creen P

roperty

Press the function key and pop-up Frame 10 will cover the function key, which is caused by the transparency of 0% for Frame 10, as shown below.

When the transparency is 20%.

Perform the offline test and press the function key, the displayed effect is shown as below.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-54 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

When the transparency is 80%.

Perform the offline test and the effect is as shown below.

Clicking the icon in [Screen Toolbar] can create a new screen.

After the screen is created, the previous screen can be displayed by selecting it in the pull-down menu

in [Screen Toolbar] or by clicking the icon, and the next screen can be displayed by clicking

the icon. If the mouse with the roller is used, the screen No. can be changed directly by using the roller.

3-4-3 Screen Creation

3-4-4 Screen Opening

3-55

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-4 S creen C

oncept

3

3-4-5 S creen D

eletion

In Project Work Space, select the screen No. to be deleted, and press the Delete key in the keyboard

or click the icon in [Screen Toolbar]. When the Confirm Screen pops up, select Yes to delete this

screen, and all the components in this screen will be deleted and cant be restored. Please be careful when you use this function.

Note Frame 0, Frame 1 to Frame 9 are all the default screens for the system, and they are not allowed to be deleted.

The function keys which are directly related to the screen operations include: Change Screen, Backward, Change Common Screen, Pop-up Screen and Change Menu Screen. Components which are directly related to the screen operations include: Direct Screen and Indirect Screen. For the contents of these components, refer to 3-6-16 Indirect Screen (Page 3-147) and 3-6-17 Direct Screen (Page 3-150).

3-4-5 Screen Deletion

3-4-6 Components Related to Screen

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-56 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 Basic Design Method

Generally speaking, one screen includes various kinds of components such as switches, lamps, number input and shapes. It is simple to add one component to the screen, and it is basically divided into 3 procedures as shown below.

Component Addition

1 Drag the component icon from [Project Library Window]-[Parts] to the Edit Window.

2 When the Property dialog box of this component appears, set the various Properties for this component such as PLC Read/Write Address, Vector Graphics or Bitmap, Label and Position etc.

3 After the various Properties of this component are set, click the [OK] button. And you can see this component has been placed in the screen after exiting from this dialog box. If required, you can adjust the size of the component by changing settings in Position in Display Setting tab or drag it to the desired position.

3-5-1 Designing Components

3-57

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-2 A bout ID

N o.

ID No. is the number automatically assigned to the component for differentiating the components on the PT. The designer cannot change component ID number artificially.

The contents represented by ID No. are as follows:

Parts:

SB: Bit Button

BL: Bit Lamp

SW: Bit Switch

DW: Direct Screen

SWD: Command Button

WL: Word Lamp

MSW: Word Switch

SCR: Scroll Bar

MV: Moving Component

ANI: Animation

AD: Alarm

TR: Data Log

XY: XY Graph

BR: Level Meter

MT: Analog Meter

RCP: Recipe

ED: Event

IDW: Indirect Screen

ND: Number Display

TD: Text Display

NI: Number Input

TI: Text Input

OS: Oscillograph

NB: Note Book

NL: Word Neon Lamp

BNL: Bit Neon Lamp

TT: Touch Trigger

GR: Table

HDD: Data History

3-5-2 About ID No.

BL: Bit

Lamp

BL0 0: Component No,

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-58 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Function Parts:

SC: Scale

FK: Function Key

AB: Alarm Display

TM: Timer

BG: Bitmap

VG: Vector Graphic

NP: Notepad

DT: Data Transmission

VM: Freeplotting

DTM: Date/Time Display

DG: Indirect Shape

UID: User Information

CO: Multifunction

EB: Event Display

If necessary, you can add comments to each component. The comments are used for entering remarks or descriptions of the program on creation. Therefore, the descriptions entered as the comments will be referred in future or the text entered will be used to describe when the text is printing. The entered comments will not cause any effects to the program. (The NB-Designer does not support comment printing.)

3-5-3 Additional Comments (Descriptions)

3-59

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-4 R ead/W

rite A ddress for P

LC

The correct area and address range vary with the PLC. In the following figure, PLC0 is manufactured by OMRON, while PLC1 is manufactured by SIEMENS, so their addresses are different.

All the available PLC devices can be displayed in the pull-down menu corresponding to PLC No. option.

3-5-4 Read/Write Address for PLC

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-60 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

The internal memory can be also selected, And the descriptions of internal memory are as follows:

RB and RW point to the same area. For example, RB5.0~RB5.15 and RW5 map the same area, i.e. RB5.0 is the Bit0 of RW5. But the addresses pointed by LB and LW in the memory are different, because they map the different areas. The memory addresses of LB9000~LB9999 in LB, LW.B9000.0~LW.B10255.F in LW.B, and LW9000~LW10255 in LW are reserved by the system internally for some special purposes, and the users cant use them as the addresses for the common devices, but should use their special functions according to the related manuals. For details, refer to 3-11 Address of System Memory (Page 3-328). When the recipe memory is accessed by the index address, the index address will begin to search from the address of the offset of the address displayed by LW9000. For example: If LW9000 is 50, the index address RWI100 will access the data in the address of RW150 (100+50). (For details, refer to 3-12 Recipe Data (Page 3-343).) *1 When using NB3Q-TW01B or NB5Q-TW01B, the range of addresses is 0.0 to 130500.F. *2 When using NB3Q-TW01B or NB5Q-TW01B, the range of addresses is 0 to 130500.

NB-Designer provides the powerful Vector Graphics and bitmap library, and you can create any desired graphics (such as switch, lamp, piping etc.) in the library and even you can add your own pictures to the library. The graphics can be 256-color bitmap, 16-color bitmap, 32-color bitmap or in JPG, BMP, GIF and PNG format. Every vector graphics or bitmap can create 256 statuses. The created Vector Graphics and bitmap are in [Graphics] in [Project File Window], as shown below:

Type Device Name Range Descriptions Bit LB 0~9999 The address of the local memory Bit RBI 0.0~261000.F(*1) The index address of the recipe memory that is

stored in the flash memory in D.H. format and H ranges from 0 to 15.

Bit RB 0.0~261000.F(*1) The absolute address of the recipe memory that is stored in the flash memory in D.H. format and H ranges from 0 to 15.

Bit FRB 0.0~134217727.F The absolute address of the flash memory in D.H. format and H ranges from 0 to 15.

Bit FRBI 0.0~134217727.F The index address of the flash memory in D.H. format and H ranges from 0 to 15.

Bit LW.B 0.0~10255.F The address of the local memory in D.H. format and H ranges from 0 to 15.

Word LW 0~10255 The address of the local memory Word RWI 0~261000(*2) The index address of the recipe memory that is

stored in the flash memory Word RW 0~261000(*2) The absolute address of the recipe memory that

is stored in the flash memory Word FRW 0~134217727 The absolute address of the flash memory Word FRWI 0~134217727 The index address of the flash memory Word ERW0~ERW2 0~2147483647 External Recipe Word Memory is available by

connection with the external memory.

3-5-5 Vector Graphic

3-61

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-5 V ector G

raphic

Of course, you can use the graphics library provided by the system. When you click the [Import Graphics] icon in the toolbar, the following dialog box will pop up:

The system graphics library is located in bg_vg_lib\VG directory in which the NB-Designer was installed and all the graphics are stored in the folders for each item. Select the Vector Graphics to be imported, and click Import, then the Vector Graphics will be copied into the vg file of the current project. Importing multiple Vector Graphics or bitmaps simultaneously is not supported and only one graphics in the same folder can be selected at a time before Import is clicked. All the imported or created Vector Graphics or bitmaps by the user in the whole project will be displayed in the [Vector Graphic] in [Project File Window] to facilitate the user to view and use them.

The vector graphics can be used as static images or the images representing the status of various components.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-62 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Procedure of Vector Graphics addition

1 Select [Add Graphics] in the [Draw] menu or click icon in the toolbar, and then the following dialog box will appear.

2 Input the Name, State No. and Description for the Vector Graphics (For example: To create a Vector Graphics with the name of Middle and the state No. of 2), and click OK, then the following dialog box will appear:

If you think the Vector Graphics states added just now are not enough, you can use the following methods to make addition:

Drag the mouse into State Preview Window of the Vector Graphics, select one state such as state0,

then click icon in the toolbar to create a new state. And the states that can be created are up to

256 kinds.

3-63

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-5 V ector G

raphic

3 Create the graphics displayed in these two statuses, and then save the project.

4 Go back to the Edit Window, and select one component, as shown below:

5 Check [Vector Graphics] in the [Graphics] tab of Bit Button Property dialog box, and find the name of the graphics created just now in the list, and then you can check the graphics at the specific status each.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-64 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

6 Click the [OK] button to exit from this dialog box, and this component will be displayed as the selected Vector Graphics and placed in the screen.

All the Vector Graphics imported into the project will be displayed in the [Project File Window].

If you want to modify any Vector Graphics or bitmap, you just need to find the graphics to be modified in the Vector Graphic in the Project File Window, and double-click it to open the Edit Window of this graphics, where you can modify the graphics drawn by yourself.

Note 1 When the new graphics was created, the project should be saved to keep the contents. Otherwise the con- tent will be lost.

2 No text can be added to the Vector Graphics.

3-65

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-6 B itm

ap

One bitmap includes 256 kinds of states and the created bitmap can be used in the Edit Window. The bitmap is mainly applicable to graphic area, i.e. external graphics addition.

Note The operations (such as line-drawing, drawing, text addition etc.) for the bitmaps cant be made in the Graphics Edit Window, and only the external graphics addition can be done.

Procedure of bitmap addition

1 Select [Add Graphics] in the [Draw] menu or click icon, and then the following dialog box will appear.

2 Select [Bitmap] in the Type, and input State No. and Name, then click OK.

If you think the bitmap state added just now is not enough, you can use the following methods to make addition:

Drag the mouse into State Preview Window of the bitmap, select one state such as state0, then

click icon in the toolbar to create a new state. And the states that can be created are up to 256

kinds.

3-5-6 Bitmap

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-66 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Click [Draw Toolbar] icon, find the needed graphics, and click it to open it. Only the pictures can be input into bitmap and the tools such as Line cant be used in the bitmap, as shown below.

4 After the project is saved, you can use it through the bitmap component in the Edit Window.

3-67

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-6 B itm

ap

Use of Bitmap

1 Double-click the component where the bitmap will be used and then enter Graphics tab.

2 Check Bitmap option, and select the bitmap you want to use, then click OK button to close the dialog box.

Import of Bitmap

1 You can import the bitmap just like importing the Vector Graphics. Click Import Graphics

icon , and select Bitmap image (*.bg) in the Type in the pop-up dialog box. You can

also import the bitmap used in the other project or the System Graphics Library. The system graphics library is located in bg_vg_lib\VG directory in which the NB-Designer was installed and all the graphics are stored in the folders for each item.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-68 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 In the same project, the bitmap and the Vector Graphics are placed in the same location, i.e. VG folder under Project File folder. And all the imported bitmaps are stored in project\ \image folder. Dont delete these pictures; otherwise the graphics library will not be displayed normally.

Note There is no limitations for the size of the graphics imported (BMP, JPG, GIF, PNG), and the graphics will be compressed according to the maximum used size (The maximum used size = Maximum length Maximum Width in the project) during the compilation.

Label refers to the text displayed in the surface of the components such as switch, lamp or the other components.

Label Addition

1 Select [Label] in the Property page of the selected component.

2 Check Transport Font.

3-5-7 Creating Label

3-69

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-7 C reating Label

3 As shown below, write the contents to be displayed for the label in [Message].

4 Set the display Properties such as the alignment method, font size and color etc.

5 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup.

State Number State number is only effective for the component with multiple states. The text for every state can be displayed independently. The text, font, color and alignment method for the corresponding state can be set after the state is selected.

Message Input the text to be displayed in the component surface here. If there are several lines, you can use Enter key to break them.

Font Size The size of Bitmap Font is as follows: 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 72, 96, 120 and 144 pixels.

Position When the input text for the label is 2 lines or more, Left, Right or Center can be selected for the alignment between the upper line and the lower line.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-70 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Color You can select color among 40 colors (65536 colors, which include supplementary colors). Default Color palette contains the most commonly-used colors. Custom Color palette allows the users to customize the palette (65536 kinds of colors available).

NB-Designer provides a simple method (i.e. the Task Bar) to make the screen pop up or be minimized, to change the display of the screen and fast switch the screen display etc.

Task Bar has 2 operation buttons, one of which is used to control the Menu Screen, and the other is used to control the Task Bar.

You can set the Properties such as the Task Bar, whether to use the Menu Screen, color and position and so on in the [PT Property] in the Configuration and Setup Window. (By default, all the options in the Display Task Bar are checked.)

3-5-8 Task Bar and Operation Buttons

3-71

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-8 T ask B

ar and O peration B

uttons

If Menu Screen is checked, one Menu Screen will pop up when the Menu Screen button at the left side is pressed. Function keys put in the Menu Screen allow the different screen switched. Because the Menu Screen is always displayed on all of the screens, therefore it can be operated at any time. If you want to switch to a certain screen, it just needs to press the function key pointing to the destination screen once, thus avoiding the boring process of looking for the screen.

In the task bar, 16 icons can be arranged at the same time. The functions keys of [Minimize] or [Title Bar in Pop-up Screen] included in Pop-up Screen allow the screens to minimize in the task bar. For details, refer to 3-7-2 Function Key (Page 3-201).

Process of Operation Button Setup Double click PT in the Configuration and Setup Window. Then the PT Property dialog box will appear, and set [Display Task Bar], whether the operation button will locate in the left side or right side of the screen, the background color and the text position method of the taskbar in [Task Bar] tab. If the label isnt displayed completely, you can adjust the width or the height of the button area and the font size of the label to solve this problem.

Note The Menu Screen is displayed on the left side or the right side of the panel during the operation. In edit window state, the Menu Screen is an independent screen, and it is Frame 2 by default. For details, refer to 3- 10-2 Task Bar (Page 3-292).

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-72 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Type and Characteristics of Font NB-Designer provides 3 available fonts, i.e. Bitmap Font, graphic font and vector font. The characteristics of these three fonts will be described as follows:

Bitmap Font : One bitmap font is prepared for each character. But this method has obvious disadvantages:

(a) Only SimSun is supported.

(b) The scaling effect is poor. For each character, 3 kinds of bitmaps (i.e. 88, 168, 2416(height width)) are reserved respectively, so the effect is very poor when the larger font is displayed, as shown below:

(c) Single-byte character may be treated as double-byte character. ASCII code is treated as a single- byte character, but the other character are converted to double-byte character in the software. Therefore, a character varies in its width for each character (such as Russian) cannot be displayed correctly.

Therefore, this method has the obvious disadvantages for the project with multiple languages.

Graphic Font: Graphic font is converted to one bitmap and stored in the project. This method can make full use of the fonts installed in Windows and the display effect is good.

(a) The capacity of the project becomes greater. There are 2 reasons for the large space needed for saving the character string as bitmap. First, bitmap format itself needs a large space. For example: Four characters displayed in Zero SimSun needs 1824 bytes, as shown below:

In addition, the bitmap font should be intercepted again if the content, size or colors vary slightly, thus causing a linear increase in the occupied space. When a character is converted as a bitmap, it is converted as the unit of character string, not the unit of the character. Even if a similar character is different with its content, font size, color, the character is converted as an individual bitmap. As the converted bitmaps are stored in the NB project file for each character string with different properties as above, the capacity occupied with the fonts should be increased in the project.

(b) Text library or some component labels do not support the graphic font.

Vector Font: The characters used for labels or supposed to be used in future are abstracted through specified fonts by NB-Designer. Only the abstracted characters are stored as True Type font (ttf style) and can be used by the NB-Designer units.

Using vector font in NB-Designer can avoid the disadvantages of Bitmap Font and graphic font.

Vector font has the following advantages:

3-5-9 Fonts

3-73

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-9 F onts

(a) It supports a large variety of vector fonts. The TrueType font (only the font in ttf format) installed in the operating system can be used.

(b) You can save the capacity of project file. It adopts the method of intercepting the matrix from the font file, thus reducing the capacity of the font file. For the same character in the same font, only one matrix needs to be intercepted regardless of the size, color, bold/italic styles.

(c) Rich font styles are available. Bold and italic styles are available for each kind of font.

(d) The font size can be set freely without any deformation. You can set the consecutive font sizes without any projections.

(e) It supports powerful multiple languages. You can use it to set fonts for each state and each kind of language of the text.

(f) The vector font can be used in the text library.

Use of Vector Font The functions and components related to the vector font are as follows:

1 Text Library

Using the text library can realize the reuse of the text and the multi-language project.

The operation instructions related to the font:

(a) Maximum language number setup

The maximum language number can be set up to 32. If smaller capacity of project file is preferable, set the maximum language number to the least necessary number.

(b) Default font setup for each language

The user can set the default font for each language, and when the user uses the text library, he doesnt need to reselect the font each time.

2 Text Component

Text component can display the character information statically. And the user can use the multi- language text when the text library is used.

(a) The text component can use 3 kinds of fonts, i.e. Bitmap Font , graphic font and vector font.

(b) In the text library mode, the text component can reset the font for each language by changing the language displayed currently.

3 Label

Most of the components can use the label. The text string can be directly input and the text library can also be used in the component label.

(a) When the text library isnt used, different fonts can be set for text string in each state.

(b) When the text library is used, fonts can be set for the text string of each language and in each state.

4 Component dealing with numbers

Number components include number input component and number display component.

After the vector font is set for the number input component, the content of the number input component will be displayed as vector font to realize the better display effect.

5 Component dealing with text strings

Text components include text string input component, text display component and note book component.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-74 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

(a) Limitations to ASCII codes for the vector font: The text contents used for the component dealing with text string often cant be decided during the compilation of the project, and due to the limitations to the storage capacity, all the characters that may be used cant be downloaded to the PT. Therefore, these components can only use ASCII characters (The matrix information supporting all the ASCII characters for this font have been downloaded to the PT by the software.) when using the vector font.

(b) Unicode character encoding. When the Bitmap Font and the Unicode are selected simultaneously, you can use the function key to input Unicode character to the text input component.

6 Time Component

Time component can display the information such as year, month, day, hour, minute, second and week etc. of the current system in the simplest way.

When the vector font is selected, the time will be displayed according to the set vector font.

7 List and Drop-down List

List and drop-down list options are available for selection in the Word Switch component, and in such state, the label for the component is listed as the list. Similarly, fonts can be set for each language and each state.

8 Alarm and Event Information

Alarm and event information component can also set different vector fonts for each piece of alarm information and for each language (When the text library is used.) respectively.

Use of Font Toolbar

The software provides the toolbar for convenient font operation. When you select one or more components, you can use the font toolbar to change the font Properties of the related components. Please pay attention to the following conditions:

(a) The font attributes set through the toolbar for the current state and current language. If the attributes of other states and languages need to be changed, you can do it through the component dialog box or by changing the current state or the current language of the project, as shown below:

(b) When multiple components are selected, if the component doesnt support a certain font attribute, the attribute of this component will not be affected by using the font toolbar to set the font attribute.

Notes for Using Vector Font Based on the special realizing method for the vector font, the following conditions should be paid attention to when the vector font is used:

1 If the font which is not supported for text to be displayed is used, the font cannot be displayed correctly.

For example, if you want to display four characters using Arial font, but because these four characters are not included in the Arial character set, so four square boxes will be displayed in this case, as shown below. Therefore, you must select the fonts supporting text to be displayed.

3-75

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-10 B asic P

roperties of C om

ponent

2 Use the vector font as much as possible if the smaller capacity of project file is preferable.

Because the Bitmap Font and graphic font have many disadvantages in the storage space and resizing etc, therefore, use the vector font as much as possible.

3 The types of the vector font can be reduced when the screen can meet the requirements.

If too many types of vector fonts (e.g. dozens or more) are used by the user, the number of font files will be too many, thus affecting the compilation speed, downloading speed and screen switching speed.

4 Install the same fonts for all the PC environments to edit text strings.

If a certain project uses Microsoft Elegant Black font when it is edited on PC, and when it is transferred to another PC where no Microsoft Elegant Black font exists for editing, then all the Microsoft Elegant Black characters used in the project will be changed to arbitrary font which is decided as optimal by the operation system.

Note When the font installed with Windows is used, use it only after confirming the font will not give rise to problems under the Copyright Law.

3-5-10 Basic Properties of Component

Basic Properties of Component

Priority It is pre-reserved for the function.

Write Address

If the component supports read only, you cannot set to writing addresses. The status of the components will be displayed based on the reading addresses.

PT Number of the controlled PT. The numbers are allocated automatically when the PT is placed on [Configuration and Setup Window].

PLC No. Number of the controlled PLC. The numbers are allocated automatically when the PLC is placed on [Configuration and Setup Window].

Change Station Number

This option can be used to access the specific PLC during the communication with multiple PLCs. This option is applicable when editing only one PLC in the case one PT is connected with multiple devices or multiple PTs are connected with multiple devices.

Area/Variable Refers to the memory of PLC device to be controlled or the internal memory of the PT. For the internal address type of PT, refer to 3-5-4 Read/Write Address for PLC (Page 3- 59).

Address Specifies address to be written to.

Data Format The code type includes BIN, BCD, and LSB. When BIN or BCD code is used, it allows to display 256 of statuses at maximum and when LSB code is used, it allows to display 17 of statuses at maximum. (Refer to 10 LSB Type (Page 3-379) in the section 3-16).

Word Length Refers to the number of the occupied memories. The default number is 1, and it varies with the different component or area/variable.

System memory Refers to the internal memories provided by the PT for some special purposes. For details, refer to 3-11 Address of System Memory (Page 3-328).

Format (Range) Refers to the formats of the address types of the PLC memories or the internal memory address of the PT.

Use Variable Determines whether to use the addresses registered in the variables. For details, refer to 3-8-2 Variable Table (Page 3-244).

Use the index memory

Determines whether to use the specified memory as the index memory for the control memory of the current component. The new [Read/Write Address] = the specified [Read/Write Address] + [Index Address]. For example, when the specified written address is D100 and the index memory address is LW0, if LW0=10, the new write address is D100+10=D110.

Read Address

If the component supports write only, you cannot set to reading addresses. The status of the components will be displayed based on the writing addresses.

Description Refers to the reference name assigned to the current component (not displayed).

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-76 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

* Please refer to 3-9-3 Macro Triggering (Page 3-273).

3-5-11 Control Setting of Component

Control Setting of Component

Option Descriptions

Touch Enabling Setting

Enable Input

Checking this option means the state value can be written into the controller by triggering the effective area for the current component.

Disable Input

Checking this option means the state value cannot be written into the controller even when triggering the effective touching area for the current component.

Conditional Enabling

Security Level: Checking this option means only when the security level of the operator is higher than the minimum security level already set, the current component can be touched, and the state value can be written into the controller.

User Permission Control: Checking this option means the operator must have the permission to touch the current component and write the state value into the controller.

Indirect reference: Checking this option means only when the state of the specified bit memory or word memory meets the set conditions, the current component can be touched, and the state value can be written into the controller.

Auto show login screen

Checking this option means the Password Input Screen Frame 9 (Login screen) will pop up automatically for the user to login when the security level or the permission of the current user doesnt meet the requirement of the set level or authority.

Show Unable-to- Input

Checking this option allows Unable-to-Input figure will be displayed when the component is in invalid to input. This function is optional only when [Enable Input] or [Conditional Enabling] is checked; and touching invalid color can be set in [PT Property]-[PT Extended Properties].

Security Setting

ON Delay When the current component is pressed consecutively for this set time, the state value can be written only to the controller. The minimum unit is 100 ms. When this option is 0, this function is invalid.

Confirm Operation

Checking this option means the Confirmation Screen will pop up automatically when the current component is touched, and the state value can be written into the controller when YES is clicked, while the operation will be cancelled automatically when the user have clicked Cancel or havent confirmed YES after the set wait[s] is exceeded.

Operation Log

Checking this option means the operation event will be recorded, and displayed through the operation log element and the file in CSV format will be saved into the external memory.

Min Inteval Refers to the minimum interval between 2 operations for the same component or different components. The minimum unit is second. When this option is 0, the minimum interval is invalid.

Triggering action

Macro Checking this check box allows the macro which was specified before the current operation was completed will be triggered and executed. *

Write Notice

Word Notice Before Written

Writes the write-value into the specified address before the current operation is performed successfully.

Notice After Written

Writes the write-value into the specified address after the current operation is performed successfully.

Bit Notice Before Written

Writes ON/OFF signal into the specified address before the current operation is performed successfully.

Notice After Written

Writes ON/OFF signal into the specified address after the current operation is performed successfully.

3-77

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-11 C ontrol S

etting of C om

ponent

Example of Control Setting

Example: Setting the parameters as below to enable the value input to LW0 when LB10 is ON.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-78 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

1 Perform the offline test. When LB10 is OFF, the input by the number input component is invalid, and the icon indicating [Unable-to-Input] is displayed, as shown in the following left graphics.

2 When LB10 is ON, the input by the number input component is valid, and the icon indicating [Unable-to-Input] isnt displayed as shown in the following right graphics.

Example of Security Setting Example: Set LW0 to the address of number input component, check Operator Comfirm, and select 10 s for wait[s].

3-79

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-11 C ontrol S

etting of C om

ponent

Perform the offline test. Operate the number input component, and the Confirm Screen will pop up during the confirmation operation. In this case, press Yes to input the data successfully, press Cancel to cancel the input. If 10 seconds pass without pressing Yes nor Cancel, the Confirmation Screen will disappear automatically.

Example of Notifications Example: Set LW0 to the address of number input component. Set After Written Notice as LB10 is

ON after writing the address.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-80 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Perform the offline test. And when no data is written into the number input component LW0, LB10 is Off, as shown in the following left graphics.

When the data is written into the number input component, LB10 is On, as shown in the following right graphics.

3-5-12 Display Setting of Component

Display Setting for Component

Lock Position Checking this option means the component is locked. Once the component is locked, it cant be moved by the mouse or the moving keys in the keyboard.

X/Y Refers to the coordinate value of the vertex in the upper-left of the component.

Width/Height Refers to the width and height of the component (The unit is pixel point).

Display Checking this option means the current component is always in displayed state.

Not Display [Touching is invalid]

Checking this option means the current component is always in hide state and the touching is invalid when the component is hidden.

Conditional Display Security Level Control: Checking this option means the current component can be displayed only when the security level of the operator is higher than the minimum security level already set.

User Permission Control: Checking this option means the current component can be displayed only when the operator has the set permission.

Indirect Reference: Checking this option means the current component can be displayed only when the state of the specified bit memory or word memory meets the set conditions.

3-81

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-5 B asic D

esign M ethod

3

3-5-12 D isplay S

etting of C om

ponent

Example of Display Setting Example: Set LW0 to the address of number input component make display setting and keep LB10 as On.

Perform the offline test. When LB10 is Off, the number input component is hidden, as shown in the following left graphics.

When LB10 is On, the number input component is displayed, as shown in the following right graphics.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-82 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 Parts

Parts are designed to meet specific needs. Generally speaking, one component can realize one function, but some components should be combined with the related components or PLC to realize some specific functions, as shown below.

Most of the PLC part support bit or word addresses (Double-word operation can be performed by some components such as Number Input and Scroll Bar etc. Due to some PLCs have double-word addresses, so some PLC drivers will make conversion between double-word and word, and the user must pay special attentions to the instructions of PLC driver.

Bit Button component defines one touching area. When this area is activated, the bit address inside the PT or in the PLC can be switched to On or Off forcefully.

Components Related Components Descriptions

Number Input Function Key To create the keyboard by Function Key

Text Input Function Key To create the keyboard by Function Key

Indirect Screen Screen The created screen

Direct Screen Screen The created screen

Alarm Setting Alarm, Alarm Display To display the registered alarm information by Alarm or Alarm Display

Alarm Alarm Setting To display the alarm information registered by Alarm Setting component

Alarm Display Alarm Setting To display the alarm information registered by Alarm Setting component

Event Setting Event To display the registered event by Event component

Event Event Setting To display the event registered by Event Setting component

PLC Control PLC To make PLC program control the operations of the functions

3-6-1 Bit Button

3-83

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-1 B it B

utton

Process of adding one Bit Button component

1 Drag the Bit Button component after it is pressed will make the [Basic Properties] of Bit Button component pop up.

Write Address:Refers to the bit address corresponding to On or Off state controlled by the Bit Button component.

2 Switch to the [Bit Button] tab.

Types and Functions of Bit Button Component

Type Descriptions

Set The specified bit address will turn On when the Bit Button component is pressed. This state will continue even if the button is released.

Reset The specified bit address will turn Off when the Bit Button component is pressed. This state will continue even if the button is released.

Alternate The specified bit address will change once (OnOff, OffOn) (Switched back and forth) when the Bit Button component is pressed each time.

Momentary The specified bit address will turn On only when the Bit Button component is being pressed. Similarly, the bit address will turn Off when the component is released.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-84 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Switch to the [Label] and add the text corresponding to the state.

4 Switch to [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state.

5 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

Min Interval (seconds): Refers to the interval between 2 valid touching operations for the same component, and the default is 0 s.

6 Switch to the [Display Setting] tab and adjust the position and size for the Bit Button component.

7 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of Bit Button component.

Set On when Screen Open The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is opened.

Set Off when Screen Open The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is opened.

Set On when Screen Close The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is closed.

Set Off when Screen Close The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is closed.

Set On when Screen Maximized The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is maximized.

Set Off when Screen Maximized The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is maximized.

Set On when Screen Minimized The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is minimized.

Set Off when Screen Minimized The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is minimized.

Set On when Backlight Off The specified bit address will turn On when the screen containing the Bit Button component is displayed in the screen and the backlight is Off.

Set Off when Backlight Off The specified bit address will turn Off when the screen containing the Bit Button component is displayed in the screen and the backlight is Off.

Set On when Input Success The specified bit address will turn On when the input using one Number Input component in the screen containing the Bit Button component is successful.

Set Off when Input Success The specified bit address will turn Off when the input using one Number Input component in the screen containing the Bit Button component is successful.

Type Descriptions

3-85

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-2 B it Lam

p

Bit Lamp displays the On/Off state of bit address inside a specified PT or of PLC device. If the state is 0, the graphics with state of 0 will be displayed; If the state is 1, the graphics with state of 1 will be displayed. If Transport Font is checked, the Label values corresponding to the different states can be set and displayed.

Process of adding one Bit Lamp

1 Drag the Bit Lamp icon after it is pressed, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box for Bit Lamp component will pop up.

Read Address: Refers to the bit address controlling the displayed information (such as the state, graphics, label and so on) of the lamp.

Address: Refers to the bit address corresponding to the lamp.

2 Switch to the [Bit Lamp] tab.

3-6-2 Bit Lamp

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-86 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Function: Blinking rate is set in Cycle box with the unit of 100 ms (If the rate is set to 500 ms, both ON time and OFF time of the Bit Lamp are 500 ms.).

3 Switch to the [Label] tab and add the texts corresponding to the On and Off states.

State: Off will be displayed when the lamp state is 0; while On will be displayed when the state is 1.

Alignment: Three methods are available, as shown below:

Left: The input content is put in the left side of the graphics.

Function

Address State of Bit to Be Read

ON (value 1) OFF (value 0)

Display (Blink/Not Blink) State No. Display

(Blink/Not Blink) State No.

1 Not Blink 1 Not Blink 0

2 Blink 0 Not Blink 0

3 Blink 1 Not Blink 0

4 Not Blink Switching between 0 and 1 Not Blink 0

5 Not Blink 0 Blink 0

6 Not Blink 0 Blink 1

7 Not Blink 0 Not Blink Switching between 0 and 1

8 Blink 0 Not Blink 1

9 Blink 1 Not Blink 1

10 Not Blink Switching between 0 and 1 Not Blink 1

11 Not Blink 1 Blink 0

12 Not Blink 1 Blink 1

13 Not Blink 1 Not Blink Switching between 0 and 1

3-87

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-2 B it Lam

p

Right: The input content is put in the right side of the graphics.

Center: The input content is put in the center of the graphics.

Font Size: Displays the size of the font used by the content input to Message and the following types are available.

Color: Displays the colors of fonts used by the content input to Message, and the user can use Custom Color to specify the desired colors.

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab, and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to represent the graphics corresponding to the On and Off states of the bit address.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-88 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

5 Switch to the [Display Setting] tab and adjust the position and size of the lamp component.

6 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the lamp component.

Bit Switch is the combination of the Bit Lamp and the Bit Button component. It defines a touching area, and the bit address inside the PT or of the PLC can be switched between On and Off state when this area is enabled.

Process of adding one Bit Switch

1 Drag the Bit Switch icon after it is pressed, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of Bit Switch component will pop up.

3-6-3 Bit Switch

3-89

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-4 C om

m and B

utton

Read Address: Bit address controls the display information of Bit Switch such as the status, graphic, and label.

Write Address: Bit address writes the status of On or Off controlled by the Bit Switch.

Address: Refers to the Read/Write Address corresponding to the switch.

2 Switch to the [Bit Switch] tab and set switch type.

Types and Functions of Switch

3 Switch to the [Label] and add the text corresponding to the state.

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab, and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to display the bit address state and represent the touching area.

5 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

6 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Bit Switch component.

Command Button component also defines a touching area and the state value will be input into the specified word address when the area is enabled.

Type Descriptions

Set The specified bit address will turn On when the component is pressed. The state remains even if the component is released.

Reset The specified bit address will turn Off when the component is pressed. The state remains even if the component is released.

Alternate The state of the specified bit address will change once (OnOffOn) when the component is pressed each time.

Momentary The specified bit address state will turn On or Off when the component is pressed or released respectively.

3-6-4 Command Button

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-90 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Process of adding one Command Button component

1 Dragging the Command Button component icon after it is pressed will make the [Basic Properties] of Command Button component pop up.

Write Address: Refers to the word address controlling the Command Button component.

Address: The first address of word address corresponding to the Command Button component.

Word Length: Set word length of the write address. Either of 1 (single word) or 2 (double words) can be specified.

3-91

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-4 C om

m and B

utton

2 Switch to the [Command Button] tab and set the Type for the Command Button component.

Setting Mode is as follows.

Type Descriptions

Set Values The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when this component is pressed. *

Set values when screen is loading

The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when one screen is opened. *

Set values when screen is unloading

The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when one screen is closed. *

Set values when screen is maximized

The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the screen is maximized. *

Set values when screen is minimized

The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the screen is minimized. *

Set values when backlight is OFF

The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the backlight is Off. *

Set values when input suceeded

The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the number or text is input successfully. (Input the constant to be set in Set Value.)*

Set values when input failed

The preset constant will be written to the specified word address when the number or text is not input successfully. *

Add value Each time this component is pressed, the value of the specified word address will be increased by the Addend once, and its result will not exceed the Upper.*

Subtract value Each time this component is pressed, the value of the specified word address will subtract the Subtrahend and its result will not be less than the Upper.*

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-92 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

*Indirect Reference: Refers to the variables that can be used by the setting or the upper/lower limit etc.

For example:

(a) When Setting Mode is Set Value.

Assuming the write address of the Command Button component is LW0 with the Type of Set Value, check [Indirect Reference] and select LW10 as the address of variable parameter.

JOG++ Everytime command button is pressed for the time longer than the time to be specified Delay Time, the value * set to Addend is added to the value of the write address with the interval set to JOG Speed. The result will not exceed the Upper. When [Ignore Delay Time] is checked, the Addend will be added to the value of the specified word address immediately each time the component is pressed. If this component is pressed for a long time, the Addend will be added to the value of the specified word address at the interval of JOG Speed time until the Upper is reached.

JOG— Everytime command button is pressed for the time longer than the time to be specified Delay Time, the value set to Subtrahend * is subtracted from the value of the write address with the interval set to JOG Speed. The result will not be less than the Lower. When [Ignore Delay Time] is checked, the Subtrahend will be added to the value of the specified word address immediately each time the component is pressed. If this component is pressed for a long time, the Subtrahend will be added to the value of the specified word address at the interval of JOG Speed time until the Lower is reached.

JOG++ (Circle) Everytime command button is pressed for the time longer than the time to be specified Delay Time, the value * set to Addend is added to the value of the write address with the interval set to JOG Speed. Until the Upper is reached, and then it will increase from the Lower again.

JOG—(Circle) Everytime command button is pressed for the time longer than the time to be specified Delay Time, the value * set to Subtrahend is subtracted from the value of the write address with the interval set to JOG Speed. Until the Lower is reached, and then it will decrease from the Upper again.

Type Descriptions

3-93

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-4 C om

m and B

utton

The settable indirect reference values are single-WORD BIN or BCD values. The value range varies depending on the selected data format.

When LW10 is 5, it means the Set Value is 5. In this case, clicking Set will write the value of LW10 (i.e. 5) into LW0.

Perform the offline test and the effect is shown as below.

BIN(unsigned) 0-65535

BIN(signed) -32768 — 32767

BCD 0-9999

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-94 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

(b) When Setting Mode is Add value.

Assuming the write address of the Command Button component is LW5 with Type of Add value, check [Indirect Reference] and select LW15 and 2 as the first address of variable parameter and the default word length respectively. The Addend address and the Upper Limit address are set by LW15 and LW16 respectively.

In addition, place 2 Number Input components with the addresses of LW15 and LW16 respectively as well as 1 Number Display component with the address of LW5.

When LW15 is 10 and LW16 is 100, LW5 will increase by 10 each time when Set is pressed until the upper limit (i.e. 100) is reached and then stop increase.

3-95

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-4 C om

m and B

utton

Perform the offline test and the effect is shown as below.

3 Switch to the [Label] tab and add the text describing the state.

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to display the bit address state and represent the touching area.

5 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

6 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Command Button component.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-96 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Word Lamp is the component which will switch the display information according to the value of the specified word address.

Process of adding one Word Lamp component

1 Drag the Word Lamp component icon after it is pressed will make the [Basic Properties] of Word Lamp component pop up.

Read Address: Refers to the PLC address controlling the displayed information (such as the state, graphics, label and so on) of the Word Lamp component.

Address: The first address of word address corresponding to the Word Lamp component.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the Read Address, and 1 and 2 are available (i.e. word or double-word).

2 Switch to the [Word Lamp] tab and set the state for the Word Lamp component. You can set the state from 1 to 256 in the dropdown box corresponding to State No..

Map Value: Refers to the value corresponding to each state. When the value of read address is equal to the map value, the state number corresponding to this value will be displayed.

3-6-5 Word Lamp

3-97

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-5 W ord Lam

p

3 Switch to the [Label] tab and add the different displayed texts corresponding to the different states.

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to display the graphics corresponding to the state of the Word Lamp component.

5 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Word Lamp component.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-98 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Word Switch is the component which changes the status value of the value specified for each status value and send the value to the specified address. The status value is changed by increasing or decreasing for each touch operation or by selecting from the list. When changing the status, the mapping value specified for each status will be sent to the specified memory. The statuses can be set up to 256.

Process of adding one Word Switch component

1 Drag the Word Switch icon after it is pressed will make the [Basic Properties] of Word Switch component pop up.

2 Switch to the [Word Switch] tab and set the State No. and the value corresponding to each state for the component. You can set the state from 1 to 256 in the dropdown box corresponding to State No..

3-6-6 Word Switch

3-99

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-6 W ord S

w itch

Functions of Word Switch:

For the control modes of Add and Sub, [Unloop] is not checked by default.

State No.: All 256 statuses can be set at maximum. (When BIN or BCD code and LSB code are used, or when LSB code is used, the status of 256 (at maximum) and the status of 17 (at maximum) will be displayed, respectively. Refer to 10 LSB Type (Page 3-379) in the section 3-16).

The line spacing for the list and the dropdown list can be set:

Map Value: When the value read by the read address is equal to a certain value in the Map Value, the Word Switch component will display the label and the graphics corresponding to the state number of this value. When a certain state number is switched to, the value corresponding to this value will be written into the write address.

3 Switch to the [Label] tab and add the text corresponding to the state.

4 Switch to [Graphics] tab, and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to display the memory state and represent the touching area.

5 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

Type Descriptions

Add Each time this component is pressed, 1 will be added to the state number, and the map value of the corresponding state will be written into the specified write address, and the graphics corresponding to the state will be displayed according to the specified read address at the same time.

Unloop: When it is checked, and the value of the memory for write address is equal to the value mapped by the set maximum state number, the component doesnt act when the switch is pressed again. When it isnt checked and the value of the memory of write address is equal to the value mapped by the set maximum state number, the value of the memory for write address is equal to the value mapped by the minimum state number.

Sub Each time this component is pressed, 1 will be subtracted from the state number, and the map value of the corresponding state will be written into the specified write address, and the graphics corresponding to the state will be displayed according to the specified read address at the same time.

Unloop: When it is checked, and the value of the memory for write address is equal to the value mapped by the minimum state number, the component doesnt act when the switch is pressed again. When it isnt checked and the value of the memory of write address is equal to the value mapped by the minimum state number, the value of the memory for write address is equal to the value mapped by the set maximum state number.

List All the set states will be displayed in the list form, and the current state is differentiated by the specified color.

Dropdown List All the set states will be displayed in the dropdown list form, and the current state is differentiated by the specified color and the first information displayed in the dropdown list represents the current state.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-100 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

6 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Word Switch component.

List and Dropdown List List: Refers to the value of the specified memory corresponding to the state of each option. By default, the value of specified memory corresponding to the first option is 0, and the value of specified memory corresponding to the second option is 1, and so on.

For example: (1) Create a Word Switch in which read address and write address are LW0 and a number

display component in which address is LW0.

(2) Set the Control Mode and State No. to List and 6 respectively.

(3) Create the labels with the contents as shown below.

3-101

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-6 W ord S

w itch

(4) Perform the test and select 33333 in the list component, and 3 will be displayed in the State No.

Dropdown List: When this component is touched, one list will pop up under this component. All the options are available in this list, and it will automatically disappear when one option is selected.

For example:

(1) Create one Word Switch with read address and write address both of LW0 and one Number Display component with the address of LW0.

(2) Set the Control Mode and State No. to Dropdown List and 6 respectively.

(3) Set the label contents to 00000 to 55555.

(4) When performing the offline test and selecting the list, the status will be displayed with a list shown in the following figure on the right.

(5) Touch this component, and the list option will pop up as the above right graphics shown.

(6) After one option is selected, the list will disappear automatically.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-102 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

XY Graph reflects the correlation of two variables visually. If you want to monitor the XY Graph reflecting the changes of address values, the NB Unit can clearly displayed it out only by using this component.

When the sampling number with M channel per page is set to N, the values are stored to the PLC, e.g. X11, Y11, X12, Y12, …, X1N, Y1N, …, XM1, YM1, …, XMN, YMN. The number of the memory addresses occupied by the PLC is MN2.

Note For Xij, Yij, subscript i represents the channel number, j represents the sampling point, and Xij represents the coordinate position of X for sampling point j in channel i.

Process of adding one XY Graph component

1 Press the XY Graph component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of XY Graph component will pop up.

Read Address: Specifies the word address of PLC corresponding to the data of X-axis trajectory, and the word address corresponding to Y-axis is read address + 1. If the channel number is greater than 1, the addresses corresponding to the 2nd channel are as follows: read address +2 sampling points for X-axis and read address + 2 sampling point +1 for Y-axis and so on.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to XY Graph.

Data Format: Includes BIN or BCD.

Word Length: It is determined by the channel number, sampling points, and the type of selected type of storing. The word length cannot be changed manually.

3-6-7 XY Graph

3-103

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-7 X Y

G raph

2 Go to the [XY Graph] tab and set the parameters related to the XY Graph.

Type: Includes Single page and Multiple pages.

If Single page display is selected, only the data change information of the sampling value in the current page is displayed, and the points out of the sampling points in single page will not be saved and displayed. If Multiple pages display is selected, the old data can be displayed by scrolling and the data in the past can be saved. In this way, when the XY Graph is scrolled forward, the previous sampling data will not be lost. The history data is stored in the memory for the reference in future.

Property (it is available option when [Trend] is selected for [Draw Type]: Refers to the horizontal direction and vertical direction, i.e. the graphics is displayed in horizontal direction or vertical direction when the sampling data is displayed.

Sampling Methods: They are shown as below.

Cycle: Refers to the interval between the sampling points each 2 pages with the unit of s or 100 ms.

Sampling Method Descriptions

Periodic sampling The data is sampled periodically.

OFFON trigger sampling Only when the state of the specified bit address turns ON from OFF, the sampling is triggered.

ONOFF trigger sampling Only when the state of the specified bit address turns OFF from ON, the sampling is triggered.

OFFON trigger sampling Only when the state of the specified bit address changes, the sampling is triggered.

OFFON reset trigger sampling Only the state of the specified bit address turns ON from OFF, the sampling is triggered, and the state of the specified bit address will be reset automatically after the triggering.

ONOFF reset trigger sampling Only the state of the specified bit address turns OFF from ON, the sampling is triggered, and the state of the specified bit address will be reset automatically after the triggering.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-104 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

DrawType: Includes Standard, Track and Trend. The sampling methods vary with the types.

Sampling Points: Refers to the number of the sampling point displayed in the screen.

PageNum: When [Multiple pages] is selected in [Type], this option is valid. And it ranges from 1 to 32767.

Channel: Refers to the number of track line to be displayed, and it corresponds to the word length of read address to be set. And 2 word addresses correspond to one track line. The channel ranges from 1 to 16.

Pause-Clear: Set the bit address to control the pause of creating a line graph or the clear of creating a graph. [Clear] bit address = [Pause] bit address + 1. When [Clear] bit is ON, the sampling data will be cleared and when the bit turns OFF again, the sampling will continue and the changes in XY Graph will be displayed dynamically.

Scroll: The address specified by this bit is used in combination with the scroll components, i.e. the XY Graph can be viewed by directly moving the scroll bar. The scroll address should be set in consistent with the address used by the related scroll bar component. For details, refer to [3-6-22 Scroll Bar].

Time: When Save Time is checked, the below Time option can be selected. This option includes 12 words, and it is used to save the time for the latest sampling point currently. Second, minute, hour, day, month, year for the starting point and Second, minute, hour, day, month, year for the end point of the current page are stored in these 12 words respectively, and each word represent a point in time.

3 Switch to the [Channel] tab and set the parameters related to each track line.

Draw Type Descriptions

Standard Multiple points are sampled each time, and X and Y components are included. Number of the occupied memory depends on the number of channel and sampling points. For example, if there are m channels and n sampling points, number of the occupied memory is mn2.

Track One point is sampled each time, and X and Y components are included. Number of the occupied memory depends on the number of channel. For example, if there are m channels and n sampling points, the number of occupied memory is m2.

Trend Multiple points are sample each time, and only Y component instead of X component is included. Number of the occupied memory depends on the number of channel and sampling points. For example, if there are m channels and n sampling points, number of the occupied memory is mn.

3-105

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-7 X Y

G raph

Color: Specifies the color for each track line.

Line Width: Refers to the thickness of the line, and 8 kinds of line width are available here.

Storage Format: Sets the data type used by the user and 6 kinds are available.

Y Min/Y Max: Sets the minimum value and maximum value of the data corresponding to each track line in Y direction. When the read value is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value, only the maximum value or minimum value will be displayed in the XY Graph.

X Min/X Max: Sets the minimum value and maximum value of the data corresponding to each track line in X direction. When the read value is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value, only the maximum value or minimum value will be displayed in the XY Graph.

4 Switch to the [Extended Properties] tab and set Channel Properties, Grid Properties and Variable Period etc.

Extended Properties Descriptions

Channel Properties Select the channel to be edited. The optional channel depends on the channel number set in Data Log Property tab. And the set the Line Style and Line Width of track line corresponding to the channel.

Display Style Dot

LINE

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-106 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

5 Switch to the [Save Data History] tab and set information to be saved.

Save to Recipe Data Field: Checking this option means the data will be saved into the address of memory for recipe memory in the PT (i.e. RW memory).

Connect Type X axis projection

Y axis projection

Marker Properties Select the Marker graphics from the 7 available graphics .

Marker Size Sets the size of Marker.

Marker Color Sets the color of Marker.

Use Grid Checking this option means the Data Log will use the background and grid effect provided by the system, and the lines and columns of the grid to be displayed and the color, width and type of grid line, etc. can be set respectively.

Indirect Reference of Sampling Cycle

When periodical sampling is used, the sampling time will be read from the specified memory.

Indirect Reference of Number of Sampling Points

The sampling points will be read from the specified address.

Extended Properties Descriptions

3-107

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-7 X Y

G raph

The area used for storing data can be calculated with those formulas as follows.

Standard or Track: 20 + Sampled pages x 4 + Sampled pages x Sampled points x Number of Channels x 2

Trend: 20 + Sample pages x Sampled points x 4 + Sampled pages x Sampled points x Number of Channels

6 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the XY Graph component.

Example: When the maximum value and minimum value of a line graph (Drawing method: Standard) are specified indirectly.

Descriptions: The coordinate position of sampling point 1 and sampling point 2 correspond to x, y (LW10, LW11) and x, y (LW12, LW13); and the minimum values and maximum values of y coordinate and x coordinate are LW20 & LW21 and LW22 & LW23 respectively.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-108 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Example: When the maximum value and minimum value of a line graph (Drawing method: Track) are specified indirectly.

Descriptions: The position coordinate is allocated as below. There is only 1 sampling point whose coordinate value corresponds to x, y (LW10, LW11), and the minimum values and maximum values for y coordinate and x coordinate are LW20 & LW21 and LW22, LW23 respectively.

Y coordinate min = LW20; Y coordinate max = LW21 X coordinate min = LW22; X coordinate max = LW23

3-109

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-7 X Y

G raph

Example: When the maximum value and the minimum value of a line graph (Drawing method: Trend) are specified indirectly.

Descriptions: The position coordinate is allocated as below: There are 2 sampling points corresponding to y1 (LW10) and y2 (LW11), and LW20 and LW21 correspond to the minimum (lower limit of Y) and the maximum value (upper limit of Y) respectively.

Y coordinate min = LW20; Y coordinate max = LW21 X coordinate min = LW22; X coordinate max = LW23

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-110 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Perform the test and the effect is as shown below.

Y coordinate min = LW20; Y coordinate max = LW21

3-111

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-8 M oving C

om ponent

Moving Component can be used to put one Vector Graphics or bitmap into the position specified by PLC in the PT. The state and absolute position are provided by the 3 consecutive memories in PLC. The read address controls the status of the component, the address of the Read Address + 1 controls the coordinate position X, and the address of the Read Address + 2 controls the coordinate position Y.

Process of adding one Moving Component

1 Press the Moving Component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Moving Component will pop up.

Read Address: Controls the first address of the word address controlling the displayed information (such as the state, graphics, label and so on) of the Moving Component in PLC.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Moving Component.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the read address, which is fixed to 3.

3-6-8 Moving Component

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-112 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Switch to the [Moving Component] tab and set the Type, State Number, the Minimum of X, Maximum of X, Minimum of Y and Maximum of Y.

Type and Function Tables:

NB-Designer can assign up to 256 kinds of different states to the components. When State Number is set to «1» in the tab [Moving Component], make sure that the stored value specified to the [Read Address] is 0. Otherwise, the components will not be displayed, States 1 to 256 correspond to the internal values of 0 to 255. The position control is as shown below, and its position is relative to the original position (X-axis and Y-axis represent abscissa and ordinate respectively.)

The Type includes the items as follows.

Control Mode X Y X & Y

Number of Read Address

2 words 2 words 3 words

Read Address States of Vector Graphics or bitmap

States of Vector Graphics or bitmap

States of Vector Graphics or bitmap

Read Address + 1 X-axis displacement Y-axis displacement X-axis displacement

Read Address + 2 — — Y-axis displacement

3-113

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-8 M oving C

om ponent

The descriptions of the Type are as follows.

X Axis Only When this option is selected, the Moving Component can only move horizontally along X-axis and the input maximum (minimum ) value is invalid and the Read Address and the Read Address + 1 are used to store the component state and position respectively in this case.

Y Axis Only When this option is selected, the Moving Component can only move vertically along Y-axis and the input maximum (minimum ) value is invalid and the Read Address and the Read Address + 1 are used to store the component state and position respectively in this case.

X & Y Axis When this option is selected, the Moving Component can move along X-axis and Y-axis, and the Read Address, the Read Address + 1 and the Read Address + 2 are used to store the component state, X-axis position and Y-axis position respectively.

X Scaling When this option is selected, the Moving Component can only move horizontally along X-axis, but the relative moving position can be set through the input value and proportional value (For example, when the value of PLC to be read ranges from 0 to 1000, but the relative position to be moved in the PT ranges from 0 to 640, the minimum values and maximum values of proportion value and input value are 0 & 640 and 0&1000 respectively.) and the Read Address and the Read Address + 1 can be used to store the component state and the position respectively.

Y Scaling When this option is selected, the Moving Component can only move vertically along Y-axis, but the relative moving position can be set through the input value and proportional value (For example, when the value of PLC to be read ranges from 0 to 1000, but the relative position to be moved in the PT ranges from 0 to 480, the minimum values and maximum values of proportion value and input value are 0 & 480 and 0&1000 respectively.) and the Read Address and the Read Address + 1 can be used to store the component state and the position respectively.

X Reverse Scaling

This option functions are similar with X Scaling but the component moves toward the opposite direction. When the value of position coordinate increases, the component moves leftward. When it decreases, the component move rightward.

Y Reverse Scaling

This option functions are similar with Y Scaling but the component moves toward the opposite direction. When the value of position coordinate increases, the component moves upward. When it decreases, the component move downward.

X Scaling Y Scaling

The Moving Component moves horizontally along X-axis and Y-axis, and the relative position can be set through the input value and the proportion value (For example, set the parameters as below. When the stored PLC address specified to X axis ranges from 0 to 640, but should set the value to be moved relatively in the range from 0 to 320 and the stored PLC address specified to Y axis ranged from 0 to 480, but should set the value to be moved relatively in the range from 0 to 240.).

X Scaling Y Reverse Scaling

The Moving Component moves horizontally along X-axis and Y-axis, and the relative position to be moved can be set, and the component can move along the opposite direction of Y-axis. When the value of Y-axis is increased, the moving component moves upward, and when the value of Y-axis is decreased, it moves downward.

X Reverse Scaling Y Scaling

The Moving Component moves horizontally along X-axis and Y-axis, and the relative position to be moved can be set, and the component can move along the opposite direction of X-axis. When the value of X-axis is increased, the Moving Component moves leftward and when the value of X-axis in decreased, it moves rightward.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-114 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

When the Scaling is selected, the relation is as shown below.

When the reverse scaling is selected, the relation is as shown below.

Indirect Max/Min Reference: The upper limits and lower limits of X-axis and Y-axis are directly read from the memory address.

For example:

It is assumed that the type of the Moving Component is X Reverse Scaling Y Reverse Scaling and the type of indirect address is LW10, then the Minimum of X and Maximum of X are the values of LW10 and LW11 respectively, and Proportional Lower Limit of X and Proportional Upper Limit of X are the values of LW12 and LW13 respectively, and the Minimum of Y and Maximum of Y are the values of LW14 and LW15 respectively, and the Proportional Lower Limit of Y and Proportional Upper Limit of Y are the values of LW16 and LW17 respectively.

as shown below.

3 Switch to the [label] tab and add the corresponding texts to be displayed.

X Reverse Scaling Y Reverse Scaling

The Moving Component moves horizontally along X-axis and Y-axis, and the relative position to be moved can be set, and the component can move along the opposite directions of X-axis and Y-axis. When the value of X-axis is increased, the Moving Component moves leftward, and when the value is decreased, it moves rightward. When the value of Y-axis is increased, it moves upward and when the value is decreased, it moves downward.

Display Position=Current Position+ (Maximum Input Value-Minimum Input Value)

Read Value

— — Minimum

Input Value Maximum

Proportianal Value Minimum

Proportianal Value( () )

Display Position=Current Position+ (Maximum Input Value-Minimum Input Value)

Read Value

— — Minimum

Input Value Maximum

Proportianal Value Minimum

Proportianal Value( () )

3-115

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-8 M oving C

om ponent

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to move or display the state.

5 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Moving Component.

If it is Scaling Type, specify the Max/Min value.

The maximum value and minimum value of Moving Component supports Indirect Max/Min Reference.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-116 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

The Animation component is used to put the component into the position with the specified track in the PT, and this position is determined by the preset path and the data of PLC. The status and absolute position of the component in the PT is determined by the data in the 2 consecutive PLC memories. Generally speaking, the Read Address and the Read Address + 1 are used to store the state and the position in the preset path respectively. When the values in the position memory of PLC (Read Address + 1) change, the Vector Graphics or bitmap will jump to the next position in the preset path.

Process of adding one Animation component

1 Click the Animation component icon and drag it on the screen.

2 Set the path and moving point for the component in the PT, left click the mouse one by one on each moving node, and right-click the mouse after the setup of path and moving nodes to complete the setup.

3 Enter the parameters in [Basic Properties] tab in the [Animation Property] dialog box.

Read Address: Refers to the word address controlling the state and label of the Animation Component in PLC, and [Read Address + 1] refers to the word address controlling the position of the Animation component. The data in the memory will be converted into BIN or BCD format (Refer to the Word Lamp component.). Here, [Word Length] is limited to 2.

3-6-9 Animation

3-117

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-9 A nim

ation

Read Address Assignment:The word address specifying the position on the path which was set previously is set automatically to Read Address + 1.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Animation component.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the read address, which is fixed to 2.

4 Switch to the [Animation] tab.

State No.: Selects the total states displayed by the Animation component. It determines the number of states of the Vector Graphics or bitmap displayed in the preset path.

Add Node: Adds one moving node in the end of the preset path.

Insert Node: Inserts one moving node after the moving node pointed by the mouse.

Delete Node: Deletes one moving node.

Move Up: Moves the moving node pointed by the mouse into the place before the previous node.

Move Down: Moves the moving node pointed by the mouse into the place after the next node.

Graphics Size (Width/Height): This is the size of Animation Components displayed on the path. On all moving nodes, vector graphics or bitmap are displayed in the state which was resized with the parameter specified by this item.

Moving Node List: Displays all the numbers and coordinate values for all the track nodes, and No.0 is for the 1st moving node, and No.1 is for the 2nd moving node, and so on. The total number of the moving node is determined by the number of moving node when you put the component in the PT at the beginning. X(Y) represent the coordinate position corresponding to the moving node, and you can reset the coordinate position for each moving node here.

Read Address States of Vector Graphics or bitmap

Read Address + 1 Position No. in the preset path.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-118 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

5 Switch to the [Label] tab and add the corresponding texts to be displayed.

6 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select Vector Graphics or bitmap to move or display the state.

7 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Animation component.

The Number Input component can be used to display the current data contained in word address inside a specified PT or of PLC, to input data through the pop-up keyboard and to change the data contained in this address by pressing ENTER button.

Process of adding one Number Input component

1 Press the Number Input component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Number Input component will pop up.

Read/Write Addresses: Refers to the specified word address read and written by the Number Input component.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Number Input component.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the address.

3-6-10 Number Input

3-119

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-10 N um

ber Input

2 Go to the [Numeric Data] tab.

Data Format: Sets the data format corresponding to data contained in specified word address and 7 types are available.

Max/Min Value Setting: Setting the range of input available value.

Over Max/Under Min: Specifying color of the value displayed when it exceeds the Max or the Min of the value.

Flash: When the value of the specified word address is greater than the Max or less than the Min, the value of the component will be flashed to make the transfinite alarm more visible.

Proportional Conversion: The value of the specified word address will be converted according to the settings and displayed on number input component. To select this function, [Min Value] and [Max Value] must be set.

For example: it is assumed that the original data is represented by A and the displayed data by B, then the data B can be obtained by the following conversion formula:

B = [Minimum Proportional Value] + (A — [Minimum Value of Original Data]) Proportion

Where, Proportion = ([Maximum Proportional Value] — [Minimum Proportional Value]) / ([Maximum Value of Original Data] — [Minimum Value of Original Data])

Take the following graphics as example, when the original data is 20, then the value after conversion is 15 + (20-0) (55-15) / (100-0) = 23, so the value displayed in the component will be 23.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-120 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Switch to the [Font] tab and set the font size, color and alignment method, etc. for the displayed value.

Font Size: Sets the size of the font.

Position: Sets the displayed position of the value. For example, set Integer, Decimal and the input value to 5, 0 and 23 respectively, then the formats as shown below will be displayed.

3-121

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-10 N um

ber Input

Display Position Indent: Increases the width of the display area for the font rightward with the unit of pixel point.

4 Switch to the [Keyboard Setting] tab and make Keyboard Setting for the pop-up keyboard type and check Use Input Order.

Default Keyboard: Refers to the keyboard used by the Common Sheet, all of the Number Input components will call the 3:NUM keyboard. The default setting of Number Input is Use [Default Keyboard].

Specified Keyboard: One specified keyboard will be called and only after checking in the [Screen Attribute] check box of the [Screen Property] dialog box for the page set by function keys and others and setting [Keyboard] for [Screen Property], the keyboard can be displayed in the dropdown list of the [Specify Keyboard].

Keyboard Pop-up Position: 9 positions can be adjusted.

Other Input Methods (Function Key etc): Using the function keys, the keyboard is specified when entering numbers.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-122 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Use Input Order: In the order of number input of [Input Order] specified to number input, text input, or Note book, numbers and text strings can be entered continuously. Touching [Enter] during data entry allows to move the cursor among input components in the order of the numbers of [Input Order] which were specified by [Use Input Order] (Ascending order: 1—>2—>…—>last No.—>1— >…) In this settings, the keyboard will not be closed automatically and will be kept to be displayed on the screen until touching to [X] (closing component) displayed on the keyboard.

Group is used to classify the multi-group of components needing consecutive inputs. The components with the same group number belong to the same group, and the cursor will be cyclic in the same group of components. When the Enter is pressed, the keyboard will not be closed automatically, but will always be displayed in the screen until the close button X in the keyboard is touched.

Setting of [Use Input Order]

Go to [Keyboard Setting] Property tabs for the Number Input component, Text Input component and Note Book component respectively, and check the [Use Input Order].

5 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state.

6 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

7 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Number Input component.

Storage Format: (1) Decimal System (signed int/unsigned int):

The data is displayed in decimal (0~9). The data is displayed according to the instructions for the digits after the decimal point and the data will be arranged from the digits after the decimal point. For example, the digits after the decimal point is 2, then 14561 will be displayed as 145.61. «-«(minus) is treated as an Integer.

3-123

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-10 N um

ber Input

Data after Proportional Conversion: The value of the communication addresses set is converted proportionally before displaying. The conversion formula is as follows.

The converted value will display the data according to the digits before the decimal point and the digits after the decimal point. For example, the value to be converted is 123.456, but the digits after the decimal point and the digits before the decimal point are 2 and 3 respectively, so the converted value is displayed as 123.45 and the last digit is cut.

(2) Hexadecimal System (hex): The data is displayed in hexadecimal format (0~F), and the conversion ratio and the decimal point are eliminated.

(3) Binary System (bin): The data is displayed in binary format (0 and 1), and the conversion ratio and the decimal point are eliminated.

In the hexadecimal and binary formats, the input maximum value or minimum value are treated as unsigned integer.

(4) Password (password): Only **** can be displayed and all the values to be read are hidden, and it is used to input the password. Its conversion ratio and the decimal point are eliminated.

(5) Single-precision Floating-point Value (float): The data in the controller will be converted into the decimal data from the data in 32-digit IEEE floating format and will be displayed in decimal format.

(6) Double-precision Floating-point Value (double): The data in the controller will be converted into the decimal data from the data in 64-digit IEEE floating format and will be displayed in decimal format.

For details about the single-precision floating-point value and double-precision floating- point value, refer to IEEE-754 Standard.

+=Value after Proportion Conversion

Minimum Value after Proportion Conversion (Maximum Input Value-Minimum Input Value)

Read Value

— — Minimum

Input Value Maximum Value after

Proportion Conversion Minimum Value after

Proportion Conversion( () )

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-124 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

The Number Display component is used to display the data in the specified word memory.

Process of adding one Number Display component

1 Press the Number Display component icon, drag it to the window, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Number Display component will pop up.

Read Address: Refers to the word address displayed by the Number Display component.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Number Display component.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the read address.

3-6-11 Number Display

3-125

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-11 N um

ber D isplay

2 Refer to the relevant contents of the [Number Input] component, and fill in the contents in the [Numeric Data] tab.

3 Switch to the [Font] tab and make related settings referring to the Number Input component.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-126 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup, and place the Number Display component in a proper position.

How to use the Proportional Conversion in the Numeric Data tab in Number Display Component Property dialog box. Quite a number of PLCs or other controllers dont support decimals or negatives, and in many cases, the actual values registered in PLCs or other controllers are different from the values the users want to display on the PT, thus Proportional Conversion is required. For example, the actual frequency of an inverter is 0~5000, while what is expected on the PT is 0~50 HZ, and in this case, Proportional Conversion can be used.

Another example: the range of values sampled from the PLC is 6400~32000, while the range desired to be displayed on the PT is 0.00~2.00.

This can be realized with settings shown below:

3-127

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-12 Text Input

Text Input component can modify or display the data in the specified word memory, which is analyzed through the standard ASCII character table as default settings. The input data is saved to a consecutive memory with the Registered Address as the first address. Low-byte character codes are displayed on the left, while high-byte character codes are displayed on the right.

Process of adding one Text Input component

1 Press the Text Input component icon, drag it to the window, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Text Input component will pop up.

3-6-12 Text Input

Enable the touching area and enter the input state

Input from the keyboard

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-128 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Swap high byte and low byte: Refers to the interchange of the high-byte and the low-byte for the same byte, as shown below.

Unicode: If you check the check box for this function, the specified data is dealt as Unicode.

Extended ASCII: Checking this option can display the extended ASCII characters between 080 and 0ff in the ASCII codes. When it is checked, Chinese cant be displayed in the Text Input component, Text Display component and Note Book component. Only one of [Unicode] or [ASCII] can be selected.

Read/Write Address: Refers to the word address (It contains up to 16 words, each of which contains 2 ASCII characters) displayed and modified by Text Input component in PLC.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Text Input component.

Word Length: 1~16 are available for the Read/Write Address.

2 Switch to the [Font] tab and fill in the Properties of displayed data referring to that for the Number Input component.

3-129

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-12 Text Input

3 Switch to the [Keyboard Setting] tab and select the keyboard type.

4 Switch to [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state.

5 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

6 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Text Input component.

The storage method of the text input is explained as below. (1) Select [Left] in [Alignment] of [Font Property]

When the character A is input

When characters AB are input

Highest Word Word 2 Word 1 Lowest Word (Word 0)

High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 41(H)

A

Highest Word Word 2 Word 1 Lowest Word (Word 0)

High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 42(H) 41(H)

B A

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-130 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

When characters ABC are input

(2) Select [Right] in [Alignment] of [Font Property]

When the character A is input

When characters AB are input

When characters ABC are input

Highest Word Word 2 Word 1 Lowest Word (Word 0)

High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 43(H) 42(H) 41(H)

C B A

Highest Word Word 2 Word 1 Lowest Word (Word 0)

High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

41(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H)

A

Highest Word Word 2 Word 1 Lowest Word (Word 0)

High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

42(H) 41(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H)

B A

Highest Word Word 2 Word 1 Lowest Word (Word 0)

High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

43(H) 42(H) 41(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H) 20(H)

C B A

3-131

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-13 Text D isplay

The Text Display component can display data in the specified word memory, which is analyzed through the standard ASCII character table in default settings. Low-byte character codes are displayed on the left, while high-byte character codes are displayed on the right.

Process of adding one Text Display component

1 Press the Text Display component icon, drag it to the window, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Text Display component will pop up.

Swap high byte and low byte: Refers to the interchange of the high byte and the low byte for the same byte, as shown below.

Unicode: If you check the check box for this function, the specified data is dealt as Unicode.

Extended ASCII: Checking this option can display the extended ASCII characters between 080 and 0ff in the ASCII codes. When it is checked, Chinese cant be displayed in the Text Input component, Text Display component and Note Book component. Only one of [Unicode] or [ASCII] can be selected.

Read Address: Refers to word address memory of PLC to be displayed (It contains up to 16 words, each of which contains 2 ASCII codes).

3-6-13 Text Display

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-132 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Text Display component.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the read address with 1 to 16 available.

2 Switch to the [Font] tab and set the font size, alignment and color of the text to be displayed.

3 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state.

4 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

5 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Text Display component.

The value specified of the communication address is displayed in level picture based on the upper limit value and the lower limit value set by [Level Meter Property].

3-6-14 Level Meter

3-133

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-14 Level M eter

As shown as below, the user can customize Level Meter with any desired shape.

Process of adding one Level Meter component

1 Press the Level Meter component icon, drag it to the window, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Level Meter component will pop up.

Read Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Level Meter component.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the read address, supporting sing-word and double- word.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-134 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Switch to the [Color/Shape] tab and make settings as shown below.

3-135

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-14 Level M eter

Detailed descriptions of the Level Meter Properties

Bar Type Normal Indicates the percentage relationship between the actual value and the set range by means of a Level Meter.

Offset Displaying the value over the [Offset] for the actual value by means of a Level Meter.

Example: Maximum 100, Minimum 0, Offset Value 40

Bar Shape Rectangle Circle

Display direction

Bottom to Top

Top to Bottom

Right to left Left to Right Clockwise Counterclockwise

Target Value When the value of the specified memory falls to the range [target value [allowable] gap]) specified to the [Allowable gap], the fill area of the Level Meter will be displayed in the specified color.

Meter Width When the Level Meter is of a Circle shape, the width of the fan can be set with the unit of pixel point.

Start Angle When the Level Meter is of a Circle shape, the Start Angle of the fan can be set.

End Angle When the Level Meter is of a sector shape, the End Angle of the sector ring can be set. If the start angle is different from the end angle, shape of the meter will be fan-shaped.

100

50

0

D100=70

D100=20 D100=70

100

50

40

0

100

50

40

0

100

50

0

0

50

100

100 50 0 0 50 100

100

60

50

40

0

100

60

50

40

0

100

60

50

40

0

100

60

50

40

0

D100=30 D100=40 D100=60 D100=70

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-136 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Switch to the [Scale] tab and make settings as shown below.

Color This option is used to set the colors for the normal state, warning the upper or lower limit value, border and background of the Level Meter.

Flash Over Max

When the value of the specified memory exceeds the set Alarm Upper, the filled area of the Level Meter flashes.

Flash Under Min

When the value of the specified memory falls below the set Alarm Lower, the filled area of the Level Meter flashes.

Minimum/ Maximum

Sets the upper and lower limit values of the display area for the Level Meter. The percentage of filled area in the Level Meter can be derived from the following formula: Percentage of filled area in the Level Meter = (Value read by the memory — [Minimum value])/([Maximum value] — [Minimum value]) 100%

Indirect Max/Min Reference

Sets the upper, lower limit values and offset value of the Level Meter display area to be read from the specified memories.

Alarm Upper/ Alarm Lower

Sets the range of the alarm area. When the value of the specified memory falls below the Alarm Lower or exceeds the Alarm Upper, the filled area will be displayed in the specified color.

Indirect Alarm Over/Alarm Upper Reference

Sets the upper and lower limit values of the alarm area in the Level Meter display area to be read from the specified memories.

Detailed descriptions of the Level Meter Properties

100 80

50

20

0

100 80

50

20

0

100 80

50

20

0

D100=10 D100=40 D100=80

3-137

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-14 Level M eter

Note When the Level Meter is of a Circle shape, scale display is not supported.

Scale Properties

Use Scale Scale Color Sets the scale color of the Level Meter.

Show Scale Frame Determines whether to show the scale frame.

Number of Main Scales

Sets the main scale number to be displayed.

Length of Main Scale

Sets the length of the main scale with the unit of pixel point.

Number of Minor Scales

Sets the minor scale number to be displayed.

Length of Minor Scale

Sets the length of the minor scale with the unit of pixel point.

Scale display position

Left of the bar Right of the bar Top of the bar Bottom of the bar

Display Number on Scale

Font Sets scale font Properties.

Integer Refers to the integer places displayed by the scale, which cant be changed by the user himself and is decided by the number of digits specified by the decimal.

Decimal Refers to the decimal places displayed by the scale, which can be changed by the user himself.

Disable Enable

0 50 100 0 50 100

100

50

0

100

50

0

0 50 100

0 50 100

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-138 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and make settings as shown below.

Select proper graphics for the Bar Picture to improve the display effect.

5 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Level Meter component.

Level Meter — Word

3-139

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-14 Level M eter

Bar picture — word

Current

Alarm

Variable

Min

MinMax

Max

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-140 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Level Meter — Double-word

3-141

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-14 Level M eter

Normal and Offset

When the [Offset] is selected, only the greater part of the values set by the offset value. For example, setting 50 to [Offset value] and storing 60 in the communications address, only the area corresponding to 50 to 60 of level meter will be filled.

Comparison of display effects between Normal and Offset:

Normal Offset

Indicating the range from the current value to lower limit value.

Indicating the range from the current value to the [Offset].

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-142 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Rectangle and Circle

Comparison of display effects between the Rectangle and Circle.

Rectangle Circle

3-143

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-15 A nalog M

eter

Analog Meter can display the data in the specified memory by means of a Analog Meter diagram.

Process of adding one Analog Meter component

1 Press the Analog Meter component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Analog Meter component will pop up.

Read Address: Refers to the word address of the value displayed by the component.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Analog Meter component.

Word Length: 1 and 2 are available for the read address.

3-6-15 Analog Meter

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-144 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Switch to the [Analog Meter] tab.

Descriptions of Analog Meter Component Properties

Dial Shape Includes Pie, Circularity (up pointer) and Circularity (down pointer).

Hand Color Selects the color of the hand of the Analog Meter component.

Length Sets the length of the hand of the Analog Meter component. The maximum length cannot be longer than the radius of the meter.

Width Sets the width of the hand of the Analog Meter component.

Hand Style Sets the style of the hand of the Analog Meter component.

Use Scale Check the check box to use the scale.

Scale Color Selects the color of the display scale of the Analog Meter component.

Show Scale Frame Checking it means the scale frame needs to be displayed.

Number of Main Scales

Sets the number of the main scale of the Analog Meter component. (0 to 50 available)

No use show scale frame Use show scale frame

3-145

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-15 A nalog M

eter

3 Switch to the [Analog Meter Component Extended Property] tab.

Length of Main Scales Sets the length of the main scale of the Analog Meter component. The maximum length cannot be longer than the radius of the meter.

Number of Minor Scale Sets the number of the minor scale of the Analog Meter component. (0 to 10 available)

Length of Minor Scale Sets the length of the minor scale of the Analog Meter component. The maximum length cannot be longer than the radius of the meter.

Display Numbers Checking it means the scale notation needs to be displayed.

Font Clicking Font can set the font used by the scale notation.

Integer Refers to the number of integer places of the scale notation of the Analog Meter component. (not settable, but adjusted automatically according to the number of places of the maximum value of the Analog Meter component)

Decimal Sets the number of decimal places of the scale notation of the Analog Meter component. (0 to 8 available)

Display Axis Checking it means the size and color of the dial axis of the Analog Meter component need to be set.

Axis Width Sets the size of the dial axis of the Analog Meter component. The maximum width cannot be wider than the radius of the meter.

Axis Color Sets the color of the dial axis of the Analog Meter component.

Descriptions of Analog Meter Component Extended Property

Maximum and Minimum

Sets the display range of the Analog Meter component to the constants.

Indirect Max/Min Reference

The upper limit value and lower limit value of displaying range for the analog meter will be read from the value of specified address.

Warning Checking it means the meter component displays by the color specifying the normal range and warning range (the range exceeds the upper limit value and the range falls the lower limit value).

Descriptions of Analog Meter Component Properties

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-146 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state.

5 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Analog Meter component.

Meter Sector Sets the thickness of the alarm range and the thickness of the fan block. The maximum thickness cant exceed the radius of the actual circle formed by the Analog Meter component, but must be equivalent to or less than Meter Sector External

Meter Sector External Sets the radius of the fan block. The maximum radius cant exceed the radius of the actual circle formed by the Analog Meter component, but must be equivalent to or greater than the Meter Sector.

Max Value/Min Value Sets the normal range of the Analog Meter component to constants.

Indirect Max/Min Reference

Sets the normal range of the Analog Meter component to variables, and specifies the memory address for reading data.

Descriptions of Analog Meter Component Extended Property

1) Meter Sector

1)

2)

2) Meter Sector External0

25 50

75

100

3-147

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-16 Indirect S creen

Indirect Screen can make an already created screen pop up on the current screen. Please refer to [3-4-3 Screen Creation]. Generally, the screen called by the Indirect Screen is smaller than the full screen (but it can also be of the same size as the full screen). In Indirect Screen specifications, pop- up displays the screen of the screen No. supporting the stored value of the word address specified to the [Read Address]. The number arranging indirect screens is not restricted in NB-Designer, but the pop-up screens can be displayed simultaneously up to 16 screens at max.

Value 0 is used to close the screen, and value -1 means to make screen 0 pop up, while the values other than 0 or -1 mean to make the corresponding screens pop up.

3-6-16 Indirect Screen

Command Button, write address is LW100, setting mode is «Set Constant»

Indirect screen, read address is LW100.

Press this button, pop-up screen 20

screen 20

Press this button, pop-up screen 21

screen 21

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-148 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Process of adding one Indirect Screen component

1 Press the Indirect Screen component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Indirect Screen component will pop up.

screen 0

Press this button, pop-up screen 0

Press this button, close indirect screen

3-149

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-16 Indirect S creen

Read Address: It defines a display area and is able to display screen contents. The screen of the No. supporting the stored address specified to the read address will be displayed as pop-up screen. For example, if the value turns to 20, screen 20 will pop up (However, this screen must be created already.), while, when the value turns to 0, the Pop-up Screen will be closed. If the pop-up screen is closed using the function key, the value of the address specified to the read address cannot be updated. When closing the pop-up screen, set 0 to the read address.

Address: Specifies the word memory address storing the Indirect Screen No.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the read address, which is 1 by default.

2 Switch to the [Indirect Screen] tab and specify the displaying position of the screen which is displayed in the pop-up screen specified by the [Indirect Screen] and check Indirect Reference of Display Position for the Indirect Screen.

Indirect Reference of Display Position: Checking it means the position coordinates of the popup Indirect Screen are read by the specified memories; and Not-checking means the position coordinates of the popup Indirect Screen will depend on where the component is placed in the screen.

X coordinate and Y coordinate are controlled by the specified address and the specified address + 1 respectively.

3 Press the [OK] button and properly adjust the position and the size of the Indirect Screen component.

The size of the Indirect Screen limits the display area of the pop-up screens. The pop-up screen area that goes beyond the Indirect Screen edge will not be displayed. Related function keys can be added to move or minimize the screens (Refer to the Pop-up screen title bar and Minimize in 3-7-2 Function Key (Page 3-201)).

Task Bar: If the pop-up screen comes with the [Pop-up screen title bar] and [Minimize] function keys, each time a screen pops up, a small icon supporting the pop-up screen will be reserved for this screen in the task bar. Pressing the small icon for this screen will push the corresponding screen to the top of the screen. Pressing the icon for the second time will minimize the screen, and another click will restore it to its initial state.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-150 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Direct Screen can make a specified screen pop up onto the current screen. The pop-up screen will be displayed within the area of the [Direct Screen]. Normally, the Direct Screen size should be set to same as that of the pop-up screen. There is no absolute limitation on the number of Direct Screen. However, a maximum of 16 Direct Screens can be displayed simultaneously during operation. The closing or opening of the Direct Screen is only determined by the bit address of the [Read Address] that control it, while Function Key cant be used to close it. When this bit address is ON, the screen will pop up, and when it is OFF, the screen will be closed.

Process of adding one Direct Screen component

1 Press the Direct Screen component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Direct Screen component will pop up.

Read Address: When the specified read address is ON, the content of the specified screen will be displayed in the Direct Screen component area. If the pop-up screens is closed using a function key, the value of the address specified by the read address cannot be turned OFF. When closing the pop- up screen, set 0 to the read address.

3-6-17 Direct Screen

Bit Switch, read/write address is LB11

Direct screen, read address is LB11, screens No. is 20

Press this button, set all the bit of read/wirte address memery to ‘1’, and popup screen 20

3-151

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-17 D irect S

creen

Address: Specifying the address controlling the display of the pop-up screen.

2 Switch to the [Direct Screen] tab and select the Destination Screen No. to be ejected in [Screen].

Indirect Reference of Display Position: Checking it means the position coordinates of the popup Direct Screen are read by the specified memories; and Not-checking means the position coordinates of the popup Direct Screen will depend on where the component is placed in the screen.

The position of the pop-up screen is controlled by 2 memories, i.e. the X coordinate is controlled by the First address, while the Y coordinate is controlled by the First address + 1.

But for some special PLCs (such as S7-200 etc.), the address must be an even number. For example, VW80 is the memory controlling X coordinate, and VW82 is that controlling Y coordinate.

3 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup, and adjust the position and the size of the Direct Screen component. The size of the screen will limit the display area. The pop-up screen area that goes beyond the Direct Screen edge will not be displayed. Function keys can be used to move or minimize the screens. Please refer to the contents related to the function key such as Pop-up screen title bar and Minimize, etc. in 3-7-2 Function Key (Page 3-201).

X Coordinate of Pop-up Screen Y Coordinate of Pop-up Screen

First address First address + 1

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-152 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

The Alarm component will display all the alarm information enabled in the set area. The content it displays is the same as that displayed by the Alarm Display, and both of them are about the alarm information of a certain node switch (bit address). When the bit address which worked as alarm trigger is released, the alarm display will be removed. The alarm information displayed by the alarm is necessarily registered by Alarm Setting. When multiple alarms occur, the alarms will be displayed in the order descending to the newer (the top is the oldest and the bottom is the newest).

Process of adding one Alarm component

1 Press the Alarm component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Alarm component will pop up.

Read Address: The address specifying the display of the alarm is specified. All the alarm information is displayed from the latest to the oldest, i.e. if the value of the read address is N, the Nth alarm will be displayed on the first line, the alarm of the smaller No. than N will be removed.

Address: Refers to the word address using for controlling display.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the read address, which is 1 by default.

3-6-18 Alarm

3-153

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-18 A larm

2 Go to the [Alarm] tab, as shown below:

Row Spacing and Character Spacing: Specifying the row space and character space of the displayed alarm. Graphic font ignores this setting.

Display Range: 0 To 255 are available. When memory the alarm information, you need to assign a type for each piece of alarm information. For example, 3 pieces of information are registered, with 0, 1 and 2 as their types. Add an Alarm component in the screen, and set the [Display Range] to 0 To 1. Then when all of the 3 alarms occur, set to the Type0 and Type1 will be displayed in the screen.

3 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup, and adjust the position and the size of the Alarm component.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-154 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Example of Alarm component Use a Vector Graphics (VG0) as the rectangle background and another Vector Graphics (VG1) as the sunken display area. Use 2 Command Button components (SWD0, SWD1) to increase or decrease the starting lines of alarm information displayed (i.e. controlling the increase or decrease of the Read Address data). Two command button components (SWD0 and SWD1) allow the start line No. ([Read Address] of the alarm) increased or decreased to scroll the displayed alarm.

The Data Log component acquires some PLC data and displays it in the manner of a Data Log at regular intervals. When each sampling period comes to an end, new data will be read from the PLC and displayed on the right of the Data Log, which ensures the real-time display.

A typical example of Data Log is as above shown. Use one Vector Graphics as background, and use the Scale component to express the information on the related Data Logs. Then place the Data Log component above the Vector Graphics. When the trend curve should be stored in the external memory, refer to 6-1-3 Data History, Data Log and XY Graph (Page 6-7)

3-6-19 Data Log

Vector Graphic

Scale

Trends

The latest data shows on the left, and the track moves right.

3-155

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-19 D ata Log

Process of adding one Data Log component

1 Press the Data Log component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Data Log component will pop up.

Read Address: Refers to the word address of PLC corresponding to the 1st line data. And the word address corresponding to the 2nd line is Read Address + 1, and the 3rd line is Read Address + 2 and so on.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the Data Log.

Word Length: It is determined by the sampling channels and the storage format for each channel. When the stored style of all the channel is signed 16-bit, if the channel number is N (where, 1<=N<=16), the Word Length will be N.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-156 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Go to the [Trend Graphics] tab and set the parameters related to the Data Log.

Descriptions of Data Log Properties

Type Single page Only the data change information of the sampling data in the current page is displayed, and extension of Data Log is not allowed. In this style, the data which data log was updated and scrolled to be removed from the screen cannot be retained. The extension of the data log is impossible.

Multiple pages The extension of Data Log is possible. In this way, when the Data Log is scrolled forward, the data displayed previously will be retained. The historical data is stored in the memory for the reference in future.

Property Start from Left

Start from Right

Y

XO

Y

X O

3-157

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-19 D ata Log

Property Start from Top

Start from Bottom

Sampling Methods

Periodic sampling The data is sampled periodically.

OFFON trigger sampling

When the state of the specified bit memory address turns ON from OFF, the sampling is triggered.

ONOFF trigger sampling

When the state of the specified bit memory address turns OFF from ON, the sampling is triggered.

OFFON trigger sampling

When the state of the specified bit memory address changes, the sampling is triggered.

OFFON reset trigger sampling

When the state of the specified bit memory address turns ON from OFF, the sampling is triggered, and the state of the specified bit memory will be set automatically to be turned OFF after the triggering.

ONOFF reset trigger sampling

When the state of the specified bit memory address turns OFF from ON, the sampling is triggered, and the state of the specified bit memory will be set automatically to be turned ON after the triggering.

Cycle Setting the interval to perform sampling with the unit of s or 100 ms.

Sampling Mode

Continue When all the sampling points end, the sampling still continues.

Once When all the sampling points end, the sampling will stop, which means sampling is only performed once.

Sampling Points

Refers to the number of sampling point displayed in each screen.

Page No. When the [Type] in the [Trend Graphics] tab is set to [Multiple pages], specify the number of page displayed.

Channel Refers to the number of the track line to be displayed. And the channel can be set is up to 16.

Trigger memory

Setting

It is valid when Trigger sampling is selected as Sampling Methods. As the parameters are set as follows, when the state change of the specified LB100 conforms to the settings in Sampling Methods, the sampling will be triggered.

Descriptions of Data Log Properties

Y

X

O

Y

X

O

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-158 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Note When the trigger sampling is used, if multiple samplings are performed at the same timing, only single value might be acquired. When such a state is assumed, place the Data Transmission component and others on the Common Sheet and acquire the necessary data at local memory to perform the sampling for the local memory.

Pause- Clear

The default Word Length is 2. Pause function only stops to refresh the changes in the curve temporarily, and the sampling operation will not be stopped temporarily. When Pause-Clear is checked as shown blow, and the state of the specified bit address LB0 is set ON, the screen will stop refreshing temporarily When the specified bit address LB0 is set OFF, the changes in Data Log will be refreshed and displayed. Pause stop temporarily the update of the graph so that the sampling is stopped temporarily.

The address can be the trigger for Clear is temporarily allocated address + 1. If the parameters are specified as above, the bit address LB0 functions as Pause and the bit adress LB1 functions as Clear. Setting in this way, the displayed Data log screen can be cleared only the changes occurred in LB1 state.

Scroll The default value is 3. For example, if the specified memory is LW0, LW0, LW1 and LW2 will be the current browsing index value (the newest data on the index value is 0 and the value is greater, the data is older.), the starting browsing index value and the maximum browsing index value of Scroll Bar respectively. This option is valid only when Multiple pages is selected. Scroll can be used to browse the multiple Data Logs and can be in combination with the Scroll Bar. For the specific using method of Scroll Bar, refer to 3-6-22 Scroll Bar (Page 3-168).

Time It is used to save the time when the latest sampling point is performed. Time option in Control memory Setting is valid only when the Save Time is checked. The default memory is LW and the Word Length is 12.

As shown above, when the specified address is LW70, each data is stored as below: The sampling time of the oldest data within the displayed page

Second: LW70, Minute: LW71, Hour: LW72, Day: LW73, Month: LW74, Year: LW75 The sampling time of the newest data within the displayed page

Second: LW76, Minute: LW77, Hour: LW78, Day: LW79, Month: LW80, Year: LW81

Descriptions of Data Log Properties

3-159

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-19 D ata Log

3 Switch to the [Channel] tab and set the parameters related to each track line.

Color: Specifies the color for each track line.

Line Width: Refers to the thickness of the line, and 8 kinds of line width are available here.

Storage Format: Sets the data type used by the user and 6 kinds are available.

Y Min/Y Max: Sets the minimum value and maximum value of the data corresponding to each track line in Y direction.

Indirect Max/Min Reference: Sets the display range of channel track to variable, and specifies the memory address for reading range value. For the multiple channels, the memory can be specified independently, and [The Specified Indirect memory Address] is Y Min, and [The Specified Indirect memory Address + 1] is Y Max.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-160 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 Switch to the [Save Data History] tab and determine whether to check Save to Recipe Data Field.

Save to Recipe Data Field: After this option is checked and the Start Address. is set, the sampling data can be saved to the Recipe Data Field(RW).

Data History for the Data Log is saved in the [Start Address] as the top, and the memory area includes the Information Area with the size of 40 bytes (i.e. 20 words), and the Time Area with the size of Sampling Pages Sampling Points/Page 4 words and the Data Area with the size of Sampling Pages Sampling Points/Page Word Length.

When the multiple historical Data Logs saved into the recipe are used, the user must ensure that the memory area of each trend curves will not overlap each other, otherwise, the data mistakes will occur.

5 Press the [OK] button to adjust the position and size of the Data Log component.

3-161

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-19 D ata Log

Indirect Max/Min Reference of Data Log Descriptions: LW0 represents the variable making sampling for the Y coordinate, and the horizontal axis represents the Time Axis. And LW1 and LW2 correspond to the minimum value (lower limit of Y) and the maximum value (upper limit of Y) respectively.

LW1: Y Min LW0: Y Max

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-162 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Checking and Zooming Functions The zooming function can be enabled or disabled by the special system memory LB9110, i.e. the zooming function will be valid when the LB9110 is turned ON and invalid when the LB9110 is turned OFF. In order to use this function, it is necessary to set the [Type] option to Multiple pages and [PageNum] option to more than 1 in the [Trend Graphics] tab respectively. With the LB9110 being turned ON, zoom-out status of the curve can be checked only by double clicking on the Data Log, and the zoom-in status of selected curve can be checked by clicking at the start point of the curve and loosening it after dragging it to the end point of the curve.

Query of Sampling Time When LW9200 to LW9205 are used to store the time for sampling points, the user can place the Number Display components corresponding to these addresses to display the time for sampling points. Procedures:

1 Checking the [Save Time] option and [Time] check boxes ( Note this is not the sampled time) in the [Trend Graphics] tab in the [Data Log Property] dialog box: The [Time] option can be used to set the first address for saving the time, which covers 12- word-length address for saving the starting time of the Data Log (the former 6 words) and the time value of the current Data Log (the latter 6 words) in ssmmhhddmmyyyy format and BIN Data Format respectively.

3-163

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-19 D ata Log

2 The function of query of sampling time is only enabled by LB9110 when the zooming function is used. And when the LB9110 is turned ON, the zooming and checking functions can be activated. When the above functions are enabled, even if the sampling is performed, the user can choose the sampling point(s) in the real-time Data Log directly, and the time for sampling point will be stored to LW9200 to LW9205 at this time. And the time query is also available with the sampling point(s) from the Data Log being selected after the zooming in of one selected section. Description list of related addresses:

Query of sampling point value

Example of checking the operation result of sampling point information The following shows the checking of sampling point information after the Data Log with 2-channel data is zoomed in:

memory Address Descriptions Addr. Type

LB9110 Control bit of zooming function Bit address

LW9200 Second Word address

LW9201 Minute Word address

LW9202 Hour Word address

LW9203 Day Word address

LW9204 Month Word address

LW9205 Year Word address

Addresses of Special memories Function Descriptions

LW9210~ LW9210+N Displays values of each channel of browsed points.

N represents the channel number, and the sampling value of browsed points for each channel is stored. For example, if the channel number is 2, the sampling value of current browsed points for channel 1 will be stored to LW9210, and that for channel 2 will be stored to LW9211.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-164 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Recipe component can realize the data transmission from the recipe memory of PT to PLC, or vice versa. For details, refer to 3-12 Recipe Data (Page 3-343).

The Oscillograph functions similarly to the Data Log, and the difference between them is as follows: For the Data Log, the background communication still continue to do when the current screen where the Data Log locates is closed, the sampling information before the switching can be obtained when the Data Log is switched to at any time. But the data sampling of the Oscillograph is valid only in the current page, which means the Oscillograph data will not be read but be lost each time when the page is switched, and the data sampling will start from the beginning when the Oscillograph screen is switched to. The advantages of Oscillograph are as follows: The user can monitor several waveforms that dont need to be recorded for the long period, and no background communication burden will be brought. Meanwhile, the user can use the Sampling Rate function provided by the Oscillograph, the combination with the PLC allows to change the frequency of sampling point instead of only being limited on the frequency of 1s/sampling point.

Process of adding one Oscillograph component

1 Press the Oscillograph component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Oscillograph component will pop up.

3-6-20 Recipe

3-6-21 Oscillograph

3-165

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-21 O scillograph

Read Address: Refers to the word address of PLC corresponding to the 1st graph. And the word address corresponding to the 2nd graph is Read Address + 1, and the 3rd graph is Read Address + 2 and so on.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to the graph.

Word Length: It is determined by the sampling channels. If the channel number is N (where, 1<=N<=16), the Word Length will be N.

2 Go to the [Scope Chart] tab and set the parameters related to the Oscillograph component.

Descriptions of Scope Chart

Type Single page

Only the data change information of the sampling data in the current page is displayed. In this type, the data which was scrolled and removed from the screen will not be retained.

Multiple pages

The extension of Data Log is allowable. In this type, even if the Oscillograph is scrolled, the data displayed before the scrolling will be retained.

Property Refers to the start movement direction of Oscillograph track.

Cycle Refers to the interval to perform sampling with the unit of s or 100 ms.

Sampling Rate When the Sampling Rate is selected, the Oscillograph component will read the group data with the sampling rate and display them at a time. For example, when the Read Address is LW10, Sampling Rate is 2 and channel is 3, the values stored to the memory from LW10 to LW15 for each sampling rate can be read. And the assignment is as follows: two of the data is read for each sampling. The values will be read in the order of LW10, LW13 for channel 1, LW11, LW13 for channel 2, LW12, LW15 for channel 3. When the sampling time is 1 s, the above-mentioned two group data will be read each second. And when the sampling rate is used, the chart is more accurate and smooth.

Sampling Points Refers to the number of sampling point displayed in each screen.

Page No. This option is valid only when Multiple pages is selected.

Channel Refers to the number of the graph to be displayed (16 channels at max.).

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-166 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Pause-Clear The default Word Length is 2. Pause function stops temporarily the refresh of the graph and the sampling operation will not be stopped temporarily. When Pause-Clear is checked as shown blow, and the state of the specified bit address LB0 is set ON, the screen will stop refreshing temporarily When the specified bit address LB0 is set OFF, the graph will be refreshed and displayed.

Clear corresponds to the address allocated temporarily to Pause + 1. Specifying the parameters as above, the bit address LB0 functions as Pause and the bit address LB1 functions as Clear. Displayed graph can be cleared only the changes occurred in LB1 state.

Scroll The default value is 3. For example, if the specified memory is LW0, LW0, LW1 and LW2 will be the current browsing index value (the newest index value is 0 and the value is greater, the data is older), the starting browsing index value and the maximum browsing index value of Scroll Bar respectively. This option is valid only when Multiple pages is selected. Scroll can be used to browse the multiple graph and can be in combination with the Scroll Bar. For the specific using method of Scroll Bar, refer to 3-6-22 Scroll Bar (Page 3-168).

Time It is used to save the time when the latest sampling point is performed. Time option in Control memory Setting is valid only when the Save Time is checked. The default memory is LW and the Word Length is 12.

As shown as above, when the allocated address is specified to LW70, each data is stored as below: The sampling time of the oldest data within the displayed page

Second: LW70, Minute: LW71, Hour: LW72, Day: LW73, Month: LW74, Year: LW75 The sampling time of the newest data within the displayed page

Second: LW76, Minute: LW77, Hour: LW78, Day: LW79, Month: LW80, Year: LW81

Descriptions of Scope Chart

3-167

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-21 O scillograph

Note When the trigger sampling is used, if multiple samplings are performed at the same timing, only single value might be acquired. When such a state is assumed, place the Data Transmission component and others on the Common Sheet and acquire the necessary data at local memory to perform the sampling for the local memory.

3 Switch to the [Channel] tab and set the parameters related to each graph.

Color: Specifies the color for each track line.

Line Width: Refers to the thickness of the line, and 8 kinds of line width are available here.

Storage Format: Sets the data type used by the user and 6 kinds are available.

Y Min/Y Max: Sets the minimum value and maximum value of the data corresponding to each track line in Y direction.

Indirect Max/Min Reference: Sets the display range of channel track to variable, and specifies the memory address for reading range value. For the multiple channels, the memory can be specified independently, and [The Specified Indirect memory Address] is Y Min, and [The Specified Indirect memory Address + 1] is Y Max.

4 Press the [OK] button, and then adjust the position and size of the Oscillograph component.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-168 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Scroll Bar is used to change the value in the specified word memory by pressing the slider.

Process of adding one Scroll Bar component

1 Press the Scroll Bar component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Scroll Bar component will pop up.

Write Address: Refers to the address of word memory of the current browsing index value for the Scroll Bar component.

Address: Refers to the first address of the word address corresponding to Scroll Bar.

Word Length: Displays the data length of the write address, which is 1 by default.

3-6-22 Scroll Bar

3-169

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-22 S croll B

ar

2 Go to the [Scroll Bar] tab.

Word Length of Index Number: Word and double-word are available.

Direction: Refers to the moving direction of the Scroll Bar, and it includes Left To Right, Right To Left, Up To Down and Down To Up.

Background Image: Refers to the background images used by the Scroll Bar. It includes Not Used, Vector Graphics and Bitmap. If Vector Graphics or Bitmap is selected, you can select the Vector Graphics or bitmap you want to use in Image, and you can also select the State Number corresponding to the Vector Graphics or bitmap mentioned above.

Button Image: Refers to the button images used by the Scroll Bar. It includes Not Used, Vector Graphics and Bitmap. If Vector Graphics or Bitmap is selected, you can select the Vector Graphics or bitmap you want to use in Image, and you can also select the State Number corresponding to the Vector Graphics or bitmap mentioned above.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-170 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Go to the [Scroll Bar Extended Properties] tab and set the Slider Width and Indirect Max/Min Reference.

Slider Width: Checking it means the slider width will be set by manual, and Not-checking it means the slider width is 10 pixels by default.

Max/Min Value Setting:

Min: The lower limit of the Scroll Bar component is the starting browsing index value. (-2147483648 to 2147483647 available)

Max: The upper limit of the Scroll Bar component is the maximum browsing index value. (-2147483648 to 2147483647 available)

Indirect Max/Min Reference: Checking it means the starting browsing index value and the maximum browsing index value of the Scroll Bar use the variables.

Assuming the address of the index memory is LW1, the addresses of the starting browsing index value and the maximum browsing index value will be LW1 and LW2 respectively.

4 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup, and adjust the position and size of the Scroll Bar component.

3-171

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-23 E vent

Event component is used to display the event information registered in Event Setting and whose current state satisfying the triggering conditions. The Event component will display triggered event information one by one according to the time sequence of the triggered event. If the accurate time needs to be displayed, the RTC must be used or the Time must be read from the PLC.

If multiple events are triggered, the events will be displayed in the order of descending or the latest event will be at the top and the oldest event at the bottom. In addition, if 1024 events or more are triggered, the event will be deleted in order from the oldest event. When only a particular event is displayed, there may be the cases where the event suddenly disappears because of the hidden events of which the number has significantly increased to exceed 1024.

When the event should be stored to the external memory, refer to 3-10-7 Event History Setting (Page 3- 322)

Process of adding one Event component

1 Press the Event component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Event component will pop up.

Read Address: Refers to the address controlling the scroll of the event display. All the information is classified according to the triggered time of the event, and the new event is displayed on the top while the old event is displayed on the bottom. For example, the value of the read address is N, the Nth event will be displayed on the first line and the events on the lines with the smaller No. than Nth line will be removed in the screen.

Address: Refers to the word address to support the controlling the scroll.

Word Length: Displaying the word length of read address (fixed as 1).

3-6-23 Event

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-172 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Go to the [Event Information] tab.

Row Spacing and Character Spacing: Refers to the distances between two neighboring lines and characters. Graphic font ignores this setting.

Check: Includes the [Click] or [Double click].

Checked: Refers to the color after the event is confirmed.

Canceled: Refers to the color after the event is released.

Select Area: Indicates the color of the dotted line representing the selected area.

Display: Refers to the format of the Event Information Display. All the added contents (such as Sequence No. and Event Trigger Time) are displayed in the front of the event information.

Format Content Descriptions

Sequence Number Refers to the Event No. beginning from 0.

Time of Occur The time when the event is triggered.

Checked Time The time when the event is confirmed.

Time of Cancel The time when the event is released. (i.e. returns to normal).

Extended Time Format The time format is displayed as Day/Hour: Minute.

Short Time Format The time format is displayed as Hour: Minute.

Standard Time Format The time format is displayed as Hour: Minute: Second.

Precise Time Format The time format is displayed as Hour: Minute: Second: Millisecond.

Extended Date Format The data format is displayed as Year/Month/Date.

3-173

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-23 E vent

Time ascending Order Display: When this option is checked, the latest occurred event will be displayed on the bottom and the event sequence No. and the time will ascend from top to bottom, as shown below.

When this option is not checked, the event will be displayed in the descending order, i.e. the latest occurred event will be displayed on the top, and event sequence No. and the time will descend from top to bottom, as shown below.

3 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup, and adjust the position and the size of the Event component.

Date of Occur The data format is displayed as Month/Date.

Time ascending Order Display

The event is displayed in the ascending order.

Show only ongoing events

Only the event that is trigged is displayed here. And the released event will not be displayed in the Event list. If this option isnt checked, the events occurred before but return to normal will still be displayed in the event list unless the event list is cleared.

Format Content Descriptions

No. Date of Occur.

Time of Occur.

Checked Time

Time of Cancel

Event content

Ascending order by time, new trigger events are displayed on the following.

Descending order by time, new trigger events are displayed on the top.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-174 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Example of Event

1 First create a new project and [Save] it.

2 Add two events in the [Event Setting], as shown below.

Where, the 1st event is the pop-up screen 4 and the 2nd event is the pop-up screen 5.

3 Add one Indirect Screen in screen 0 of the newly created project and its [Read address] of LW5.

4 Add one Event component in screen 0, as shown below.

Place one Vector Graphics under the Event component to enhance the display effect.

3-175

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-23 E vent

5 Add one Bit Switch to control the ON/OFF state of LB10.

6 Add one Text component with the content of Increase water temperature.

7 Add one Command Button component with the settings as shown below:

Finally, the screen 0 is shown as below:

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-176 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

8 Create screen 4 with one Text component and one Bit Switch component controlling the LB10, as shown below.

9 Create screen 5 with one Text component and one Command Button component, as shown below.

3-177

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-23 E vent

10 After [Save], [Compile], [Online/Offline test] or [Download] is selected, the operation effect of the program is as shown below.

When LB10 or LW30 is triggered for its corresponding triggering conditions is satisfied, the related event information will be displayed. The popup screen 4 and screen 5 for the 2 events registered in the [Event Setting] are the pop-up screens to be ejected when the event is triggered.

Note 1 For the pop-up screen, it will pop up only when the event is confirmed.

2 For the pop-up screen for the event triggering, it can be closed by the for the Function Key or the triggering function .

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-178 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Note Book component can modify or display the data in the specified word memory.

The value of the communications address is dealt as ASCII character. The input data is saved to a consecutive memory with the Read Address as the first address. Low-byte character codes are displayed on the left, while high-byte character codes are displayed on the right. It supports the display of the multi-line text content and page turning, and can be used to make the operations such as Copy, Cut and Paste etc. for the text contents in the selected area.

Process of adding one Note Book component

1 Press the Note Book component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Note Book component will pop up.

3-6-24 Note Book

3-179

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-24 N ote B

ook

2 Switch to the [Display Setting] tab.

Descriptions of Note Book

Number of Total Lines Refers to the total lines of the text that can be input.

Number of Display Lines

Refers to the lines in the display area.

Word Memory Assignment Per Line

Refers to the maximum data length displayed in each line with the unit of word. It is one byte for ASCII character and two bytes for one word.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-180 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Switch to the [Font] tab.

4 Switch to the [Keyboard Setting] tab.

3-181

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-24 N ote B

ook

5 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state.

6 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

7 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Note Book component.

The editing of Note Book is as shown below:

The specific Properties of the Note Book are set as shown below:

LW 9170 is used to realize page turning of the Note Book, and its value represents the start line of the input area. The user can change this value to realize the display of the Note Book in the page-turning way.

Cursor operating area

Extended operating area

Selection operating area

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-182 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

The offline test effect of the Note Book is as shown below:

Example of using Text Input component to realize PinYin Input The edited effect is as shown below:

The specific operation is as follows:

1 Make PinYin Input Window as the screen title, and place one Text component, as shown below.

2 Place another function key with the Property Switch Screen of pop-up screen title bar, which overlaps above the Text component (i.e. PinYin Input Window).

PinYin Input Window

Please input your name:

3-183

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-24 N ote B

ook

Check Vector Graphics in the Graphics tab and select one Vector Graphics, as shown below.

3 Place one function key with the Property of Switch Screen of Minimize in the Function Key tab. Check Vector Graphics in the Graphics tab and select one Vector, as shown below.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-184 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 Place one function key with the Property of Switch Screen of Close Screen in the Function Key tab. Check Vector Graphics in the Graphics tab and select one Vector, as shown below.

5 Place one Text Display component LW9152 with the Word Length of 16.

6 Place one static Text Display component with the contents of Please input your name:.

3-185

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-24 N ote B

ook

7 Place another Text Input component LW20 with the Word Length of 4.

8 Create one Bit Button component with the Write Address of LB9100 in the Basic Properties tab, Type in the Bit Button tab of Alternate, Transport Font being checked together with

the State 0 and State 1 of English and respectively.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-186 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

9 Place one Command Button component LW9150 with Type, Addend and Max Value of Add value, 8 and 100 respectively in Command Button tab and the Label of PgDn.

10 Place one Command Button component LW9150 with Type, Subtrahend and Min Value of Subtract value, 8 and 0 respectively in Command Button tab and the Label of PgUp.

3-187

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-24 N ote B

ook

After all the components are placed well, the operation are as follows:

1 Trigger the Text Input component to make the cursor appear, as shown below.

2 Click the English-Chinese Switch once, then the input bar for Chinese input will appear, as shown below.

3 Several homophones will appear in the Chinese input bar after the PinYin character is input, and you can use the PgUp or PgDn button to realize page turning, and trigger the related Chinese character to complete one Chinese character input process. As shown below, for

example, if needs to be input, you just need to enter zhang through the character keyboard.

Later, when is triggered, will be displayed in the Text Input component, as shown below.

PinYin Input Window

Please input your name:

PinYin Input Window

Please input your name:

PinYin Input Window

Please input your name:

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-188 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Trigger after PinYin san is input, will be displayed in the Text Input component.

Press ENT button in character keyboard to complete this input.

Addition1 If the character needs to be changed during the input process, the function keys of BACK or Clear in the keyboard can be used to realize this operation.

2 , triggering the blank area of the Chinese Character Display screen can realize the movement of this screen, which is similar to the screen console of the function key.

4 Clicking the PinYin Input Window bar can realize the screen movement, as shown below.

PinYin Input Window

Please input your name:

PinYin Input Window

Please input your name:

Press the blue title bar can be move the screen

3-189

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-25 W ord N

eon Lam p

5 Clicking the Minimize (i.e. -) icon can make the screen minimized to the task bar. And clicking the task bar again will make the screen return to the state before it is minimized.

6 Clicking the Close (i.e. X) icon to close the screen.

The PinYin Input for the Note Book is similar to that for the Text component, and many Properties of the Note Book component are realized through the function keys.

The text string which is specified as Label is displayed in loopy-moving way, and it supports the label contents corresponding to 256 (max.) states in the loopy-moving way.

Process of adding one Word Neon Lamp component

1 Press the Word Neon Lamp component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] of Word Neon Lamp component will pop up.

2 Switch to the [Neon Lamp] tab and make settings of Moving Type, State No., Step and Speed respectively.

3-6-25 Word Neon Lamp

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-190 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Switch to the [Label] tab and add the text corresponding to the state.

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state.

5 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Word Neon Lamp component.

The text string which is specified as Label displayed in loopy-moving way, and it supports the label contents corresponding to State 0 and State 1 in the loopy-moving way.

The difference of the Word Neon Lamp and the Bit Neon Lamp is the controlling method, and the former selects the different states ranging from 1 to 256 by changing the memory value, while the latter changes the display state (only 2 states available) by changing the state of the control bit.

Process of adding one Bit Neon Lamp component

1 Press the Bit Neon Lamp component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] of Bit Neon Lamp component will pop up.

3-6-26 Bit Neon Lamp

3-191

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-27 Touch Trigger

2 Switch to the [Bit Neon Lamp] tab and make settings of Moving Type, Step and Speed respectively.

3 Switch to the [Label] tab and add the text corresponding to the state.

4 Switch to the [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or bitmap representing the touching area and touching state.

5 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Bit Neon Lamp component.

The Touch Trigger component is applicable to the conditions where the several components can be triggered to act not through the triggering method. When the triggering conditions for the specified memory of the Touch Trigger component are satisfied, the components placed in the valid area for the Touch Trigger component can be triggered to act.

1), 3) and 4) locate in the valid triggering area, while 2) locates in the invalid triggering area.

Therefore, when the set triggering conditions for the specified memory of the Touch Trigger component are satisfied, the components in area 1), 3) and 4) will be triggered, while that in area 2) will not be triggered.

3-6-27 Touch Trigger

Touch Trigger component

2)

3)

4) 1)

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-192 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Process of adding one Touch Trigger component

1 Press the Touch Trigger component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of Touch Trigger component will pop up.

2 Switch to the [Touch Trigger] tab and select the Trigger Type.

3 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Touch Trigger component.

3-193

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-28 Table

The Table component can make the selection type of Select by row, Select by Column and Select by cell. The user can set the Row, Column, Color when Selected, Background Color, Border Color, and write the selected Row No. and Column No. into the specified memory.

Process of adding one Table component

1 Press the Table component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Table component will pop up.

2 Switch to the [Table] tab and make the settings of Row, Column and Type.

The related Properties are as follows:

3-6-28 Table

Type Select by row Select by col Select by cell

memory corresponding to Row First address — First address

memory corresponding to Column — First address First address + 1

Number of Occupied memories 1 1 2

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-194 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Switch to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

4 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Table component.

The test effect of the Table component is as shown below.

If required, the Table component can also be used in combination with the Number Input component and the Macro, thus controlling the display condition through the Macro.

The Data History component can be used to read a series of date in consecutive memories from the specified word memory(s) inside PT, PLC or word memory(s) of the controller periodically and display them in the table form.

Note 1 The sampled data must be consecutive. When the Save to Recipe Data Field is checked in the [Save Data History] tab, only the saving of a little amount of data is possible for the limited capacity of recipe data field.

2 The [Read Address] for the Data History component is the memory address for data sampling by the 1st channel.

3 The Word Length of memory for Data History component is determined by the channel number, i.e. if channel number is m (0 <17), the World Length will be m.

4 Using the Data History component, the user must be check one or both of Save to Recipe Data Field and Save to External Device options in the [Save Data History] tab in the [Data History Component Property] dialog box.

3-6-29 Data History

Select by row 2 Select by col 2 Select by cell 2

Grid component application

3-195

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-29 D ata H

istory

Process of adding one Data History component

1 Press the Data History component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Basic Properties] dialog box of the Data History component will pop up.

2 Switch to the [Display Properties] tab and make the settings of display format and color etc.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-196 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Note When the variable is specified in the sampling cycle, if the value cannot be obtained within the regulated time, the value which was obtained previously will be used.

Descriptions of Display Properties

Channel Refers to the channel number of the memory to be sampled, and the channel is up to 16.

Sequence number Determines whether to display the No. of the sampling data information.

Ascending When this option is checked, the sampling data information will be displayed in the ascending order, i.e. the latest sampling data will be displayed on the bottom.

Date/Time Display Date Checking in the checkbox allows the sampling date displayed in the selected date format. The 3 formats are available, and YY, MM and DD refer to the year, month and date respectively.

Date Separator Selects the data separator with 3 formats available. For example: 11/06/24.

Time Checking it means the sampling time will be displayed and the time format can be selected. There are 3 formats available, and HH, MM, SS and MS refer to the hour, minute, second and millisecond respectively.

Color Setting Sets the Background Color and Title Bar Color for the table respectively.

Frame Setting Sets the Frame Color and Width for the table.

Border Setting Set the color, types, and width of Border, row spacing, and column spacing with the unit of pixel point. Checking the Horizontal Line check box means the border will be displayed horizontally, and checking Vertical Line means the border will be displayed vertically.

Data History Query The historical sampled data stored in the external memory can be searched by address of the word memory specified in Data History Query setting. The Word Length of the specified memory address is 2 by default.

Query by File Name

With the Query by File Name being checked, it means to call out the data history sampled today or in the latest day when the value of specified memory is 0, while the data history sampled in the last time when the value of specified memory is 1, and so on.

Query by Date When Query by Date is checked, the date will be input into the specified memory and the data history corresponding to the date will be called out. The date format is yyyymmdd, where yyyy, mm and dd refer to year, month and date respectively.

Indirect Reference of Sampling Cycle

When Indirect Reference is used, the sampling time will be read from the specified memory.

3-197

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-29 D ata H

istory

3 Switch to the [Sampling Property] tab and make the settings of Sampling Method, Cycle, Sampling Points and Pause-Clear and etc.

Note When the trigger sampling is used, if multiple samplings are executed at the same timing, only single value might be acquired. When such a state is assumed, place the Data Transmission component and others on the Common Sheet and acquire the necessary data at local memory to perform the sampling for the local memory.

Descriptions of Background Property

Sampling Method Periodic sampling The data is sampled timely.

OFFON trigger sampling

Only when the state of the specified bit address turns ON from OFF, the sampling is triggered.

ONOFF trigger sampling

Only when the state of the specified bit address turns OFF from ON, the sampling is triggered.

OFFON trigger sampling

Only when the state of the specified bit address changes, the sampling is triggered.

OFFON reset trigger sampling

Only the state of the specified bit address turns ON from OFF, the sampling is triggered, and the state of the specified bit address will be reset automatically after the triggering.

ONOFF reset trigger sampling

Only the state of the specified bit address turns OFF from ON, the sampling is triggered, and the state of the specified bit address will be reset automatically after the triggering.

Cycle Refers to the interval between 2 sampling points with the unit of sor 100 ms.

Sampling Mode Continue When all the sampling points end, the sampling still continues.

Once When all the sampling points end, the sampling will stop, which means sampling is only performed once.

Sampling Points When the sampling method is Once, the sampling will stop after the set Sampling Points is finished.

Trigger memory Setting

When the Trigger memory Setting is used for the sampling method, the memory address to be read will be specified.

Pause- Clear The default Word Length is 2. Pause function can stop the data sampling operation temporarily. In addition, the Clear function here is invalid for the Data History component.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-198 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 Switch to the [Channel Properties] tab and set the display information for each channel.

5 Switch to the [Save Data History] tab and set the Start Address. etc. to be saved.

3-199

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-6 P arts

3

3-6-29 D ata H

istory

When the Data History component and the Data Log component are used in combination and their addresses are the same, it just needs to set Save to Recipe Data Field for either of them.

If the Data History component is needed to display the value of the Data Log, the value in PLC can be transmitted to the LW of the local memory by the Timer or the Data Transmission com- ponent.

If the user needs to save the data for a long period and has low requirement of the interval for the data saving, it is recommended the sampling time will be as long as possible.

The memory area of the Data History includes «information area» for 40 bytes or 20 words. Additionally, the memory area includes the «time area» indicating sampled points x 4 words per page and the «data area» indicating sampled points x word length per page.

When the storage period is set, the file deletion is performed at the first sampling after the star- tup and every 24 hours. At the timing, any files which is beyond the storage period are deleted.

6 Switch to the [Title Bar Properties] tab and make settings of Title and column font etc.

7 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup of the Data History component.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-200 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function Parts

It is applicable to the conditions with the requirement of equal-division notation.

Process of adding one Scale component

1 Press the Scale component icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Scale Property] dialog box will pop up.

Type: Includes Vertical, Horizontal, Arc and Circularity.

No. of Equal: Set the number of equal-division for the graphics between 2 and 255.

Line Length: Set the length of the scale between 1 and 24.

Start Angle/End Angle: The start angle and the end angle of the arc between 0 and 360 degree.

2 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup.

3-7-1 Scale

3-201

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-2 F unction K

ey

Function Key provides functions such as Switch Screens, Keyboard Function, Execute Macro, Touch Calibration, Clear Event and Message Board etc. The function key is not controlled by the memory address, so the execution of specified function needs to be activated by touching this component.

Process of adding one Function Key

1 Drag the Function Key icon after it is pressed and display Function Key Property. In Function Key tab, allocate functions such as Switch Screens, Key Button, Execute Macro, Touch Calibration, Clear Event, Notepad for each function key. The NB-Series does not support Print currently.

2 Go to the [Label] tab and fill in the text to be displayed.

3 Go to the [Graphics] tab and select the Vector Graphics or Bitmap to display the state.

4 Go to the [Control Setting] tab and make the Security Setting and set the Triggering action.

5 Press the [OK] button to adjust the position and size of the Function Key.

3-7-2 Function Key

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-202 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Function Key

1 Switch Screen

Descriptions of Switch Screen

Change Screens

Pressing the Function Key will make the current Base Screen including all of the pop-up screens closed and the Base Screen with the specified Screen No. will be switched to.

Backward Pressing the Function Key can make the current Base Screen closed and return to the latest opened Base Screen, which is effective only for the Base Screen. For example, when pressing the Function Key in Frame 10 after Frame 0 has switched to Frame 10, Frame 10 will be closed and the Screen will return to Frame 0.

Change Common Sheet

After the Function Key is pressed, the Common Sheet (Frame 1 is the system default screen.) can be replaced by the specified screen which will become the new Common Sheet.

Change Menu Screen

After the Function Key is pressed, the Menu Screen (Frame 2 is the system default screen.) can be replaced by the specified screen which will become the new Menu Screen.

Pop-up Screen After the Function Key is pressed, the specified screen will pop up and be displayed above the current Base Screen, and the current screen will not be closed.

Frame 0 Frame 10

Frame 0 Frame 10 Frame 0

Frame 0

Frame 0 Frame 0

Frame 1 Frame 0 Frame 10

Common Sheet

Common Sheet

Frame2 Fast Selection

Frame10 Fast SelectionFrame 0 Frame 0

Frame 0 Frame 0 Pop-up Screen

3-203

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-2 F unction K

ey

Example: Screen switching function

(1) Create a new project and save it.

(2) Create each of Fast select window 2, Common window 1, Basic window 4, Fast select window 5, Common window 6, Pop-up window 7. The Fast select window 2 and the Fast select window 5 are the same size ((100, 220) in this case) and the Pop-up window 7 is the smaller that other screens (it is ((200,150) in this case).

(3) Create three function keys in the Fast select window 2. Three function keys such as [Change Screen] function key ti switch to Basic window 0, [Change Screen] function key to switch Basic window 4, and [Change Menu Screen] function key to switch to Fast select window 5 to switch the Base Screen shown as below.

(4) Place one text component displaying Common window 1 displayed in Common window 1.

Close Screen Closing the Pop-up Screen which is displayed in the screen placed with a function key. The screen operations with the function do not perform write of the data for the address of control which is set by the Direct Screen or Indirect Screen. Therefore, make sure that point when the Direct Screen or Indirect Screen is used.

Title bar on Pop-up Screen

Pressing the Function Key can move the Pop-up Screen to the specified position in the screen, which is effective for Pop-up Screen, Indirect Screen and Direct Screen.

Minimize After the Function Key is pressed, the Pop-up Screen will minimize to the Taskbar. Pressing this icon will make the screen return to its original position. This function is effective for Pop-up Screen, Indirect Screen and Direct Screen.

Descriptions of Switch Screen

Pop-up Screen Frame 0 Frame 0

Title Bar Frame 0 Frame 0 Frame 0

Frame 0 Frame 0 Frame 0 Frame 0

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-204 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

(5) Place one text display component to display Basic window 0 in the Basic window 0 as below. Also place [Pop-up Screen] function key to display Pop-up window 7 and [Backward] function key in the Basic window 0.

(6) Place one Text Display component to display Basic window 4 and [Backward] function key in the Basic window 4.

(7) Create three Function Keys in the [Fast select window 5]. Three Function keys such as a [Change Common Sheet] Function Key to switch Common Sheet into Common window 1, a [Change Common Sheet] Function Key to switch Common Sheet into Common window 6, and [Change Menu Screen] Function Key to switch Menu Screen into Fast select window 2 as follows.

(8) Place one Text Display component to display Common window 6 in the Common window 6.

(9) Place three Function Keys in Pop-up Screen in Pop-up window 7. Three Function Keys such as one [Title bar on Pop-up Screen] Function Key to display Pop-up window 7, a [Minimize] Function Key, and one [Close Screen] Function Key.

(10)After the completion of setup, saving the project file and executing the off-line test after the compilation, the project is displayed as below.

(11)When switching the Basic window 0 into Basic window 4 by the button in Menu Screen, pressing Back button allows the screen returned to Basic window 0 and then pressing Back button in the Basic window 0 allows the screen returned to Basic window 4.

(12)When [Pop-up Screen] is pressed in Basic window 0, Pop-up window 7 will pop up, as the upper right graphics shown.

3-205

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-2 F unction K

ey

(13)Pressing [Fast selection window 5] in Menu Screen will make the screen switch to Fast selection window 5, as shown below.

(14)Pressing [Common Sheet 1/6] can realized the switching among the Common Sheet.

2 Keyboard Function

Descriptions of keyboard function

Enter Equivalent to the function of Enter key in the keyboard.

Back Space When entering numbers or Text strings in the component [Number Input] or the component [Text Input] by Function Keys, remove one character which is placed immediately before the input cursor.

Clear Clears the contents input to Number Input and Text Input components.

Escape Cancels the input operation, equivalent to the function of Esc key in the keyboard.

Unicode Sets the input characters including 0, 1, 2, on the number keys, ASCII codes like a, b, c etc or Unicode characters for Number Input and Text Input components.

Cursor Includes Up, Down, Left, Right, Line head, Line tail, First position and Last position.

Select text Includes Start selecting and Finish selecting.

Text operation Includes Copy, Cut and Paste.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-206 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Example: Making NUM Keyboard

Number (0 to 9) keys, Float, Minus sign, Enter, CLR and Backspace keys are required in the keyboard.

Step 1: Create a new project and make the layout of the NUM keyboard.

Firstly add the new screen Frame 10 and open [Screen Property], then perform the screen operations such as setting the Width, Height and the border width to be 160, 200 and 2 respectively, setting the Frame Color, checking [Screen Attribute] and setting it to be Keyboard page. Finally divide Frame10 into three areas, i.e. Screen control area, Input Display area and Keyboard area, as shown below.

Step 2: Add the required components for the keyboard.

(1) Firstly, add one Function Key as screen title bar into the Screen control area, in this case, select Title bar on Pop-up Screen.

(2) Add two Text Display components for displaying the ranges of the maximum and the minimum for the Number Input, where the [Read Address] are LW9180 (LW9180 ~ LW9187 is the system special memory for displaying the maximum of Number Input) and LW9190 (LW9190 ~ LW9197 is the system special memory for displaying the minimum of Number Input) respectively and [Word Length] are both 6.

(3) Add one Function Key to close keyboard screen, i.e. to check [Key Button] and select Escape.

(4) Add one Text Display component to input display box in the Display area with [Read Address] set to LW9070 (LW9060 ~ LW9075 is the special memory which works as the buffer of Number Input or Text Display Input.) and [Word Length] set to 6.

(5) Add twelve Function Keys as Character Input Keys in the Keyboard area. Take an example to input [1]: Select Unicode after selecting [Keyboard Function], then input 1 in Input area. And the operation for the other characters is similar to this operation.

Add three Function Keys as the special keys, i.e. select Clear, Backspace and Enter respectively after selecting [Key Button] for the three Function Keys.

The final effects of the editing screen and the test are shown as the lower left and lower right graphics respectively.

Screen control area

Display area

Keyboard area

3-207

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-2 F unction K

ey

Example: Create Unicode keyboard by the combination of Text Input and Function Key.

The Unicode keyboard can be created by using [Unicode] option, which is available in the related Property screen of Text Display component, Text Input component and Note Book component, in combination with the [Key Button] — [Unicode] option in the Function Key Property.

(1) Make the following settings after adding two Text Input components.

(2) Add the Function Key and set the character to be input.

(3) Add one [Enter] key, i.e. select [Key Button] — [Enter] in the Key Button tab.

(4) The final effect is as shown below.

Unicode function currently only supports Chinese, English, Japanese and the common symbols.

Properties Text Input A Text Input B

Unicode Unicode Unicode

Address LW0 LW3

Word Length 3 3

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-208 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Execute Macro

After this function is selected, pressing the Function Key can execute the specified existing Macro code. (Refer to 3-9-3 Macro Triggering (Page 3-273))

4 Touch Calibration

After this function is selected, pressing the Function Key can make the system go to PT Touch Calibration Screen, thus allowing the users to perform touch calibrations to the PT.

5 Clear Event

After this function is selected, pressing the Function Key can clear the event information stored in the recipe memory.

6 Notepad

For the procedures of operation method about the Notepad, refer to 3-7-7 Notepad (Page 3- 220).

There are four methods to clear the event information: (a) By clicking the [Function Key] component to clear the event information after the [Clear Event]

option in [Function Key] tab in Function Key Property dialog box being checked. The event information data stored in the recipe memory can be cleared by this method.

(b) By restarting the PT to clear the event information after the value of special system memory LW10015 being set to 0. The event information data stored in the recipe memory can be cleared by this method.

(c) Check in the [Clear Event History] option in [NBManager] dialog box and execute the download, the event information will be cleared. The event information data stored in the recipe memory and the event information files stored in the external memory can be cleared simultaneously by this method.

(d) Check in the [Clear Event History] option in the NBDownload dialog box and execute the download again. The event information data stored in the recipe memory and the event information files stored in the external memory can be cleared simultaneously by this method, as shown below:

Functions of Message Board Function Pen Pressing the Function Key means the current function is the pen in

the Notepad.

Eraser Pressing the Function Key means the current function is the eraser in the Notepad.

Clear Block

Pressing the Function Key can clear the contents in the area selected by the mouse of the Notepad.

Pen Color For setting the pen color.

Pen Size For setting the pen size from the eight size available.

Clear Removing all the contents in the Notepad.

3-209

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-3 A larm

D isplay

Alarm Display icon can be used to display the triggered preset alarm information by using the Neon Lamp in the area where the Alarm Display locates. The alarm information must be related to node address of a certain bit, and it will scroll from the right to the left when the bit address is triggered to the alarm state. The alarm information will continue to scroll until this bit address is switched to the non- alarm state. The alarm information must be logged in the [Alarm Setting] database in advance. (This component only displays the alarm information, and the component to be displayed must be logged in the [Alarm Setting] database).

3-7-3 Alarm Display

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-210 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Process of adding one Alarm Display

1 Press the Alarm Display icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Alarm Display Property] dialog box will pop up.

Moving Step: Set the Moving Step in the unit of pixel. The larger the number of moving step, the faster the speed of scroll display. The value is between 1 and 255.

Refresh Rate: Refers to the interval of each movement with the unit of 100 ms. The larger the value of moving speed, the slower the speed of scroll display. The value is between 1 and 10000 (i.e. 0.1 s to 1000 s).

Display Range: Set the range of alarm types to be displayed between 0 to 255. Restricting the alarm types at this moment allows the display only optional alarm information.

Description: The descriptions can be entered to explain the Alarm Display components (the descriptions will not be displayed in PT screen.).

2 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup.

3-211

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-3 A larm

D isplay

Example of creating one Alarm Display component

1 Create a new project firstly.

2 Click the [Alarm Setting] icon in [Project Database] to display the logon list of alarm setting, and then add two pieces of alarm setting, as shown below.

3 Add one Alarm Display component in Frame 0.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-212 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 Add two Bit Switches to control the ON/OFF of LB0 and LB1 respectively, then switch the ON/OFF state of the LB0 and LB1, the alarm setting which was registered by the procedure 2 can be switched between display and non-display by the alarm display.

5 When saving the project files and executing the offline test after the compilation, the result will be displayed as follows.

3-213

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-4 T im

er

Timer is a kind of component performing the timing. When the timing is over, it will play the other corresponding functions such as periodical Macro instruction execution, parameter setting and data transmission etc.

Process of adding the Timer

1 First press the Timer icon before dragging it into the screen, and go to [Timer] tab after the [Timer Property] dialog box pops up.

3-7-4 Timer

Descriptions of Timer Properties

Trigger Mode

Always With this triggering mode, the timer will be triggered once it is initialized. The timer will be operated when displaying the screen in the timer was loaded to, and the timer will be stopped automatically and will not be triggered any more when the number of the timer trigger operations reaches to the value specified at Repeat Count.

When screen is loading

The timer will be operated when the timer is placed in the screen and the number of the timer trigger operations it will stop automatically after the value set in Repeat Count being reached, and will not be triggered any more. The effect of this function is almost the same as that of All time.

When screen is unloading

Function operation will be triggered once when the screen where the timer component locates is closed.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-214 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Switch to the [Timer Function] tab:

Execute Macro: The Macro code to be executed for each timing reached to the time set by the executing cycle. (Refer to 3-9-3 Macro Triggering (Page 3-273))

Data Transmission: The data transmission will be performed. The data will be transformed from the specified addresses as ([Source Data]) to the specified addresses as ([Destination Address]) for each timing reached to the time set by the executing cycle.

Source Address: Refers to the starting address that the data will be transferred from.

Destination Address: Refers to the starting destination address that the data will be transferred to.

Memory Type: Used to select among Word or Bit for the memory type to be transmitted.

Trigger Mode

Trigger Address

When the address specified at [Trigger Address] matches to the status specified at [Trigger State], the triggering operates. If [Repeat Count] is set to 0, the triggering operation is consecutively repeated until the trigger condition is released. After the trigger condition is cleared once, followed by the trigger is operated for the number of times specified at [Repeat Count], the timer will be stopped automatically.

Execution Cycle

It refers to the timing cycle of the timer with the unit of 100 ms. The timer will perform functional operation once at each interval of timing cycle.

Response Mode

Immediate When the triggering condition is met, the function will be executed immediately.

Delay When the triggering condition is met, the function will be executed after one cycle is delayed.

Trigger State

When Trigger Address is selected, the triggering state of the memory is On or Off.

Repeat Count

It refers to the times of repeated execution after the timer is triggered. When it is 0, the function will always be executed.

Trigger Address

After Trigger Address is selected, it needs to specify the address to be the trigger.

Descriptions of Timer Properties

3-215

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-4 T im

er

Data Length: Refers to the length of the data to be transferred.

State Setting: After the time set at Execution cycle passed, when the value is written to the bit address or word address, select the parameter.

Set Address: After the time which was set at Execution cycle passed, specify the bit address or word address to be written.

(a) Bit Address Setting ([Memory Type] is specified to [Bit]):

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-216 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Mode: Includes Set value, Periodic Toggle, as shown below.

The detailed description of each function is as follows.

(b) Word Address Setting([Memory Type] is set to [Word]:

Mode: Periodic JOG++(loop), Periodic JOG—(one way), Periodic Bounce(repeating after reaching), Step up(loop), Step Down(loop), Constant Setting, and Periodic JOG++(one-way) as shown below.

Mode Descriptions

Set Value After the time which was set at Execution cycle passed, specify the value of the bit address to 0 or 1.

Periodic Toggle After the time which was set at Execution cycle passed, switch the value of the bit address 0 with 1

3-217

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-4 T im

er

Mode Descriptions

Periodic JOG++(loop)

This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word increase automatically by the increment at the interval of each Execution Cycle and makes it return 0 again when the upper limit value is reached.

Periodic JOG—(one-way)

This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word decrease automatically by the decrement at the interval of each Execution Cycle and makes it stop at the lower limit value after the lower limit value is reached.

Periodic JOG++(one-way)

This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word increase automatically by the increment at the interval of each Execution Cycle and makes it stop at the upper limit value after the upper limit value is reached.

Periodic Bounce (repeating after reaching)

This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word increase automatically by the step at the interval of each Execution Cycle until to the upper limit value, and then makes it decrease by the step at the interval of Execution Cycle until to the lower limit value, and later makes it increase again, thus making the cycle repeated again and again.

Step up (loop) This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word increase automatically by the step at the interval of each Execution Cycle until to the upper limit value, and makes it increase again after being reset to the lower limit value.

Step down (loop) This mode makes the address value of the memory for the specified word decrease automatically by the step at the interval of each Execution Cycle until to the lower limit value, and makes it decrease again after being reset to the upper limit value.

Constant Setting The preset constant value will be written to the address of the memory for the specified word after the Execution Cycle is reached.

0 T V+K

NO YES

Upper

T V-K

NO

LowerUpper

T V+K

NO

Upper0

T V+K

V-K

NO

NO

Upper

Lower

Lower

YES

YES

T V+K

NO

UpperLower

YES

T V-K

NO

Upper Lower

YES

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-218 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Bitmap component is used to call and display the bg-form graphics registered in the system graphics library or the graphics library in Project File Window. Bitmap component is not controlled by the memory, and doesnt have multiple states, thus the bitmap corresponding to the graphics state specified by you at the designing time will always be displayed. For the creation and usage of bitmap, refer to [3-5-6 Bitmap].

1 First press the Bitmap icon, drag it to the screen, then select the bitmap you want to use, as shown below.

2 Press the [OK] button, and then adjust the position and the size of the Bitmap in the screen, as shown below:

3-7-5 Bitmap

3-219

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-6 V ector G

raphics

Vector Graphics component is used to call and display the vg-form graphics registered in the system graphics library or the graphics library in Project File Window. The Vector Graphics component is not controlled by the memory, and doesnt have multiple states, thus the Vector Graphics corresponding to the graphics state specified by you at the designing time will always be displayed. For the creation and usage of Vector Graphics, refer to [3-5-5 Vector Graphic].

1 Press the Vector Graphics icon, drag it to the screen, then select the Vector Graphics you want to use, as shown below.

2 Press the [OK] button, and then adjust the position and the size of the Vector Graphics in the screen, as shown below:

3-7-6 Vector Graphics

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-220 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Notepad is designed specially to provide the users with a space for the message reservation and transmission, thus allowing the users to write any text on the PT freely. And its function is similar to that of the drawing board.

Process of adding Notepad

1 Press the Notepad icon, drag it to the screen, then the [Notepad Property] dialog box will pop up.

Frame Width: Refers to the frame width of the Notepad.

Background Color: Selects the Background Color and Pattern Color.

2 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup, and adjust the position and size of the Notepad component.

3-7-7 Notepad

3-221

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-7 N otepad

The combined use of Notepad with Function Keys After the Notepad is placed well, you can set the Function, Pen Color, Pen Size and Clear after the [Notepad] is selected in the Function Key tab, as shown below.

(a) Function

Pen: After selecting the pen, you can leave messages or make drawings in the Notepad.

Eraser: Clears the contents in the Notepad.

Clear Block: Clears the contents in the selected area of the Notepad.

(b) Pen Color: Sets the pen color, as shown below.

(c) Pen Size: Sets the thickness of pen from the available 1 (the thinnest) to 8 (the thickest), as shown below.

(d) Clear: Clears the contents in the whole Notepad.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-222 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Create a Notepad

1 Makes Frame 0 as the Note pad screen. Of course you can make the other screen as the Note pad screen. And later you just need to drag the Notepad component to the screen.

2 Firstly set the Properties of the Notepad component, as shown below.

Frame Width: Select 4 here from the range of 1 to 16.

Frame Color, Background Color and Pattern Color: Select the colors you want to use here.

3 Then adjust the screen to the required size, as shown below.

4 Later add several Function Keys in the left and bottom of the Notepad component respectively, i.e. select Function Keys FK0, FK1, FK2 and FK3 to be as Pen, Eraser, Clear Block and Clear Screen respectively, select the Function Keys FK4, FK5, and FK6 to be the Pen Colors of Red, Green and Blue respectively, and select the Function Keys FK7, FK8, FK9 and FK10 to be the Pen Sizes of 2, 4, 6 and 8 respectively, as shown below:

3-223

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-8 D ata Transm

ission

5 [Save] and [Compile] the project files and execute [Offline Test] and result in the display as follows.

The system reserves the following areas for the system memory: LB9020 to LB9032: [Pen], [Eraser], [Clear Block], LB9030 to LB9032: pen size, LW9006 : operation mode of Notepad, LW9007 : pen size LW9008 : color of pen selecting among 256 colors.

For the details, refer to 3-11 Address of System Memory (Page 3-328).

Note 1 Each PT can only use one Notepad component. If there are more than one Notepad components, an error occurs at the compilation.

2 The data in the Notepad will not be saved, i.e. be lost, when the power of PT is OFF.

Data Transmission component can make the data in the specified memory address transferred to the other memory address. Data Transmission can be triggered by the manual touching method or the state change of the specified address.

3-7-8 Data Transmission

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-224 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Process of adding Data Transmission

1 Drag the Data Transmission icon to the screen after it being pressed, then the [Data Transmission Property] dialog box will pop up.

Memory Type: The Memory Type which is transmitted should be selected among [Bit] (bit data) or [Word] (word data).

Data Length: The number of data transferred by the Data Transmission component. When the Memory Type is Bit or Word, the units are bit or word respectively. A maximum 2000 partitions of data can be specified.

Source Address: Sets the source address of the transferred data.

Destination Address: Sets the destination address of the data transmission.

Indirect Reference: Set this parameter when setting indirectly the source address, destination address, and data length.

Take the following settings as example, i.e. the source address, destination address and data length use the Indirect Reference.

After setting the source address type to D memory and making the source address offset controlled by the LW100, set the destination address type to LW memory and make the destination address offset and the data length controlled by the LW101 and LW102 respectively.

3-225

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-8 D ata Transm

ission

2 Set the [Trigger Address].

Trigger Type Descriptions

OFFON When the state of the specified address is switched from OFF to ON, the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission.

ONOFF When the state of the specified address is switched from ON to OFF, the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission.

OFFON When the state of the specified address is changed, the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission.

OFFON, Reset When the state of the specified address is switched from OFF to ON, the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission. At the same time with the transmission, the specified address will be turned OFF.

ONOFF, Reset When the state of the specified address is switched from ON to OFF, the Data Transmission component will be triggered to perform the transmission. At the same time with the transmission, the specified address will be turned ON.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-226 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Make settings in the [Label], [Graphics] and [Control Setting] tabs by using the similar method for the components mentioned above.

4 Press the [OK] button to complete the setup, and adjust the position and size of the Data Transmission component.

The Freeplotting component is based on the data in the memory, and you can use it to draw the corresponding graphics by the pixel point in the PT.

Freeplotting Component Property

1 When selecting [Solid Color] for the Type (drawing graphics using the bit memory)

Set the component size to 5050, the memory address to LB0, the pattern color to red and the values of 2500 memories (i.e. LB0 to LB2499) to be read by PT. Then when the memory value is 1, the pixel point of the component corresponding to the communication address which stored the values will be applied by red color.

3-7-9 Freeplotting

3-227

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-10 D ate/Tim

e

2 Multicolor is selected for Type (Draw graphics using word memory.).

Set the component size to 5050, the memory address to LW0, and the values of 2500 memories (i.e. LW0 to LW2499) to be read by PT. Then the pixel point of the component corresponding to the communication address which stored the values will be drawn into the corresponding 65536 true color according to the actual value read from the memory.

3 There are two refreshing methods for the components.

Refresh Cycle: The graphics are updated at a certain period. The minimum unit to update the graphics can be set at 100ms.

Trigger: When the status of the bit address specified with [Trigger] matches to the condition specified with [Trigger Type], the graphics are updated.

The Date/Time component can display the value of the internal RTC clock of the PT in the set

format.

3-7-10 Date/Time

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-228 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Date/Time Component Property

The Date/Time component can only read the time of the internal RTC of the PT, but not modify the time. If the time of the internal RTC of the PT needs to be modified, you can calibrate the system time by using the system setup screen of the PT or modifying the values of system special memories LW10000 to LW10006.

Descriptions of Date/Time Component Property

Display Date Sets whether to display the date or not.

Date Format There are four formats available, where DD, MM and YY refer to the date, month and year respectively.

Date Separator Three formats are available. (e.g. 2011.06.24)

Year 4-digit Display Displays 4-digit included in the year after this option being selected. For example: 2011 Year will be displayed as 2011 or 11 after this option is checked or not checked respectively.

Zero Suppress for Month and Day

Clears zero included in the date and month after this option being selected. For example: June will be displayed as 6 or 06 after this option is checked or not checked respectively.

Display Day of Week

Sets whether to display the week or not.

Display Time Sets whether to display the time or not.

Time Format There are 2 formats available, where HH, MM and SS refer to the hour, minute and second respectively.

12-hour System(AM/PM)

The time will be displayed in 12-hour format after this option is checked. For example: 3 PM will be displayed as 3:00 PM or 15:00 when this option is checked or not checked respectively.

3-229

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-11 Indirect S hape

The Indirect Shape component can modify the positions and sizes of the rectangle, ellipse or line by changing the value of the memory.

Indirect Shape Properties

1 Indirect Shape tab

Type: Sets the shape type from the available types of the Rectangle, Ellipse and Line.

Frame/Line: Sets the Line Color, Line Width and Line Style for the rectangle and ellipse, and line.

Fill: Sets the fill color and the fill style for the rectangle and ellipse.

3-7-11 Indirect Shape

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-230 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Position

The descriptions of the specific Properties are as follows:

Indirect Reference of Upper-left Corner

Unchecked Position X and Position Y of the Indirect Shapeics are the constants.

Checked Position X and Position Y of the Indirect Shapeics are the indirect reference. Position X = First address of the set memory, Position Y = First address of the set memory + 1

Indirect Reference of Width/Hight

Unchecked The Width and Height of the Indirect Shapeics are the constants.

Checked The Width and Height of the Indirect Shapeics are the indirect reference. Width = First address of the set memory, Height = First address of the set memory + 1

3-231

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-11 Indirect S hape

Example of creating Indirect Shape

1 Set and place Indirect Shape (ellipse) components as follows:

[Shape] : Ellipse

top address of [Indirect Reference of Upper-left Corner] : LW0

top address of [Indirect Reference of Width/Height] : LW2

Storing the values as follows, the effect is shown as below:

LW0 (Coordinate position of X in upper-left corner) : 0

LW1 (Coordinate position of Y in upper-left corner) : 0

LW2 (Width) : 100

LW3 (Height) :100

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-232 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Set and place Indirect Shape (Rectangle) components as follows:

[Shape] : Rectangle

top address of [Indirect Reference of Upper-left Corner] : LW0

top address of [Indirect Reference of Width/Height] : LW2

Storing the values as follows, the effect is shown as below:

LW0 (Coordinate position of X in upper-left corner) : 50

LW1 (Coordinate position of Y in upper-left corner) : 80

LW2 (Width) : 200

LW3 (Height) :100

Screen cartesian system: Origin in the upper left corner. X-axis growth to the right. Y-axis growth to the down.

X-axis

Y-axis

80 pixels 50 pixels

3-233

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-12 U ser Inform

ation

When the system uses User Permission function, the related information of the current login user can be displayed in the table form by using the User Information component. The User Information component must be used in combination with the User Permission, otherwise it will not work. Refer to 3-10-6 User Permission Setting (Page 3-308) for the details.

The component which is unified the Bit Button and the Word Switch can operate the both the bit set and the word set through one key.

The Multifunction component can be created by using the mouse to click [Components] — [Button/Switch] — [Multifunction] or dragging [Multifunction] component from [Project Library Window] — [Function Parts] to the Edit Window. The number of Actions which can be set by the Multifunction is 16 at max.

Process of adding Multifunction component Right-click the mouse in the blank box located in the left side of Basic Properties tab in the Multifunction Property screen to add the Bit Set or Word Set in the procedure as follows.

1 Add the actions (Bit Set and Word Set). Right-click the Action List to select [Insertion Before] or [Insertion After] option to change the execution order of the component.

3-7-12 User Information

3-7-13 Multifunction

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-234 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 According to the order to be executed, change the position of the action which was added. Right-click the Action List to select [Move Up] or [Move Down] option to change the execution order of the component.

3 In order to delete the action which was added, right-click the Action List to select [Delete] option to delete this component.

4 Edit the Property of the Action.

The Property of the Action which was added (Bit Set and Word Set) can be set for each Action at the right area in the [Basic Properties] tab.

3-235

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-13 M ultifunction

The Bit Set support the Types of [Set], [Reset], and [Alternate] only.

The Word Set support the Types of [Value Setting], [Add Value], and [Subtraction Value] only.

5 If the function specified according to the Action List order (ascending order) is failed to execute normally, set the executing operations of the Multifunction by the [Exit when execution fails] checking box.

Checking the check box When executing the function in the order of the Action List, if the specified function cannot be executed, the execution of the Multifunction is quit at the moment and the Action on the List is not executed.

Unchecking the check box Even if the specified function cannot be executed, when executing the function in the order of the Action List, the next Action on the List will be executed.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-236 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Event Display is used to make the event information logged in [Event Setting] database and meeting the current triggering conditions displayed scrolling from the right to the left.

Event Display Property

1 Event Setting tab

Display Range: Specify the range of displaying types (formats) of the event.

Moving Step: The pixel point of the width to display the event information in loopy way in units of pixel.

Refresh Rate: The period to refresh the display of the event information in loopy way in units of 100ms.

Display: The contents are as follows.

3-7-14 Event Display

For the displayed format of event information, all the selected format information will be displayed before the event information.

Time of Occur. The time when the event is triggered.

Extended Time Format (D/H: M) The time format is displayed as Day/Hour: Minute.

Short Time Format (H: M) The time format is displayed as Hour: Minute.

Date of Occur.

Time of Occur.

Event content

3-237

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-7 Function P arts

3

3-7-14 E vent D

isplay

Note 1 The Event Display only displays the occurring event, and dose not support Sequence No., Time of Can- cel and Check Time.

2 Once the triggered event information is unmatched, the unmatched event will not be displayed in the Event Display anymore.

The effect of offline test is as shown below.

Standard Time Format (H: M: S) The time format is displayed as Hour: Minute: Second.

Precise Time Format (H: M: S: MS) The time format is displayed as Hour: Minute: Second: Millisecond.

Extended Date Format (Y/M/D) The date is displayed as Year/Month/Day.

Date of Occur. (M/D) The date is displayed as Month/Day.

Time ascending Order Display Checking this option means the event time ascends from the front to back with the latest event information at the end, as shown below:

Not-checking this option means the event time descends from the front to back with the latest event information at the front, as shown below:

Current trigger event is displayed in the Event Display.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-238 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 Project Database

Text Library can be used to store the text contents needed by the project, thus preventing the label with the same text from being input frequently. In addition, Text Library can be used to the conditions with the requirement of multi-language support to realize the switching among the multiple languages for the PT Edit screen. NB-Designer currently supports up to 32 kinds of languages setting.

1 Text Input

(1) Pressing icon or clicking [Text Library] in the [Project Database] of the [Project Library] allows the Text Library to pop up.

(2) When the following Add Text dialog box appears after Add being clicked, fill in the Title, State No. and click OK to proceed to the next step.

Note Once the text title is registered, it cannot be modified in the [Text Library] dialog box.

3-8-1 Text Library

3-239

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-1 T ext Library

(3) The text added just now has been in the Text Library already, and click the + placed before the Title to see the text string.

(4) Input the text in each language for each state, as shown below.

(5) If you use 2 states, it just needs to input the corresponding text to state 0 and state 1 respectively for each language, and then click OK after the completion of the text addition.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-240 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

(6) Checking the [Use Text Library] check box in the [Label] tab of dialog box for each Property allows using the text string which was registered to the [Text Library].

If you havent added the text to the Text Library, Use Text Library cant be checked and is always grayed out until you have added the text into the Text Library.

2 Multi-language Switching

The switching among the multiple languages can be realized by modifying the value of special register system memory (LW9130). As long as the value of LW9130 is changed in any one of screens, the displayed text will switch to the text (language) corresponding to the value being changed to, and the language of the whole system will be changed regardless of the condition of the current screen. Only resetting the value of LW9130 can make the language switched again.

It is based on the system special memory LW9130 to realize the multi-language switching in the Text Library.

Thats to say:

When LW9130 is 0, the contents corresponding to Language 1 in Text Library will be displayed;

When LW9130 is 1, the contents corresponding to Language 2 in Text Library will be displayed;

When LW9130 is 2, the contents corresponding to Language 3 in Text Library will be displayed;

and so on.

When LW9130 is 31, the contents corresponding to Language 32 in Text Library will be displayed;

When LW9130 is greater than 31, the contents corresponding to Language 1 in Text Library will be displayed.

Note Number of Language in [PT Property]-[PT Extended Properties] can restrict the number of Language(s) displayed in Text Library. When the Text Library is used for the first time, the default Number of Language is 8. Even if LW9130 is greater than 8, the system can only display the contents corresponding to Language 1 to Language 8. If the languages to be displayed are greater than 8 [Max No. of Languages] needs to be increased in [Language Setting] screen with [Number of Language] not exceeding [Max No. of Languages].

3-241

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-1 T ext Library

Default Language in [PT Property]-[PT Extended Properties] refers to the language number to be displayed in the default Text Library. For example: When Language 2 in the Text Library is English, if Default Language is set to 2, the text using the Text Library will be displayed as English on the System Screen after PT is powered ON and be switched to another language until the value of LW9130 is changed.

3 Language Setting of Text Library

Clicking Language Setting in [PT Property]-[PT Extended Properties] or clicking Language from the Text Library can open [Language Setting] dialog box to set the global Property of the text font corresponding to each kind of language.

Max No. of Languages: The Text Library supports up to 32 kinds of languages with the Default Language of 8. If the user needs more than 8 kinds of languages, the Max No. of Language should be increased.

Current Lang: Refers to the language being edited currently.

Font type: Sets the font type of the language used currently to Vector Font or Bitmap Font .

Font Attribute: Sets the related attributes of the language used currently such as the Font, Size, Position, Color and Italic and Bold.

Copy Font Attribute To All Language: Copying the font attribute which is edited currently to all the other languages.

Language: The description of the language which is edited currently. The entry procedure to the OS of the current PC is displayed.

Note 1 Although the font attribute for each language specified to [Language Setting] is specified to all the compo- nent as default, the font attribute specified individually for each component attribute in the [Label] tab has a high priority.

2 Changing the Font Attribute setting in [Language Setting] will not affect the component specified already the Text Library as the font attributes of label. To use the Font Attribute modified in [Language Setting], it needs to recheck Use Text Library in [Label] tab after the checking being cancelled, in order to refresh the Font Attribute setting in [Language Setting].

4 Import/Export of Text Library

Text Library has the functions of importing & exporting the registered text in CSV format. Exporting the registered text to the Text Library to the one in CSV format allows edition by the spreadsheet software. Also importing the edited file can be taken in the NB-Designer.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-242 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

Export Text Library (1) The following dialog box will pop up after Export is clicked.

(2) Click [OK] to export the file. In order to change the destination to save the file and the filename, click [>>] and specify the destination to save the file to and the filename.

(3) If the exporting is completed, the message saying The file is exported successfully! will be pop up.

The opened export file in .csv format is as shown below.

Import Text Library (1) The following dialog box will pop up after Import is clicked.

(2) After confirming the CSV file supposed to be imported is not opened by other software, select the CSV file and click [Open].

(3) If Import file successfully pops up, it means the import is successful.

3-243

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-1 T ext Library

(4) If the imported file in .csv format has the items having the same name with that in the existing Text Library of the system, the selection dialog box will pop up.

In this case, you can select Yes or No according to the circumstances.

Notes for Import & Export (1) The text strings such as Text Lib, Name and Status included in the .csv file cant be

changed, otherwise import will be impossible. Meanwhile, the value of Status must be consistent with the actual status lines, as shown below, i.e. when Status is 2, the two statuses contained in the text can only be 0 and 1.

(2) If the line-break exists in the contents of Text Library, the exported file is shown as below.

If line-break is needed in spreadsheet software file, it just needs to input $_return_$$_enter_$.

(3) Even after editing the CSV file by spreadsheet software, select Unicode Text (*.txt) for [Type of Document] to save the file and then quit the used application and finally rename the filename extension to .csv. The other file format cannot be recognized as available file to import.

(4) The Import & Export are only applicable to the whole Text Library rather than the single text item contained in the Text Library.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-244 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

5 Change of State Number of Text Library

The change method of states number of Text Library is to select one state and right-click the mouse, as shown below.

Variable Table is a useful address logon library, which prevents the inconvenience resulting from repeated input of address, thus saving a lot of time. Check the [Use Variable] check box in setting items for each component to use the address which was registered to the Variable Table with the settings for each component.

1 Clicking icon or entering [Variable Table] in the [Project Database] allows Variable Table to pop up.

3-8-2 Variable Table

3-245

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-2 V ariable T

able

2 Click Add to make the following small dialog box pop up.

Name: Inputs the name of this variable.

PT: Selects the No. of PT corresponding to this variable.

PLC No. : Selects the No. of PLC corresponding to this variable.

Memory Type: Selects the memory type corresponding to this address from Bit or Word.

Area: Selects the area corresponding to this variable from the internal memory of the PT and the memory of the PLC.

Address: Specify the address corresponding to the adding address.

Data Format: Select the data format of the adding address from BIN or BCD.

Format (Range): Displays the address format (the address range) of this variable.

3 Input the above-mentioned items respectively, and click OK, then the variable will appear in the library.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-246 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

4 Later you can use it in the other places, as shown below.

Note 1 The addresses having been logged in the Variable Table cant be changed in the other places, thats to say, they can only be used. If they are needed to be changed, you just need to enter the Variable Table dialog box to change the address.

2 Note the following points when using the Variable. The Variable specified [Bit] for the [Memory Type] can be allocated only to the bit state component. Also the Variable specified [Word] for the [Memory Type] can be allocated only to the word state component.

5 Importing/Exporting a Variable Table

You can save variable information as a CSV file by pressing the [Export] button.

3-247

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-2 V ariable T

able

Press [Import] to import the variable information from a CSV file.

6 Importing Variables of NJ and NX Series

Variables of NJ and NX series can be imported to a variable table.

(1) Click [Tools] — [Export Global Variables] — [CX-Designer] under the Sysmac Studio Menu to export the information about variables of NJ and NX series to Clipboard.

(2) Right-click on the Variable Table window. Select [Import Variable] to load the variable information exported to the Clipboard *1.

*1 Importing variables is allowed only when you are using Omron Host that executes Ethernet com- munication.

(3) A window to select a host appears after importing variables. Select the host, an import destination.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-248 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

(4) Click [OK] to import the variables of NJ and NX series.

Note You can import only variables to which AT Specification address is allocated in Sysmac Studio. Variable types to be imported are: BOOL, UINT/ INT/ WORD, UDINT/ DINT/ DWORD/ REAL. On NB-Designer, BOOL variable is replaced to Bit, UINT/ INT/ WORD are replaced to Word, and UDINT/ DINT/ DWORD/ REAL are replaced to DWORD. DWORD variable cannot be edited on NB-Designer.

To display the information on the Alarm component or Alarm Display component, the logon in the list of [Alarm Setting] database is needed. One bit address can control whether one piece of information will be displayed or not. If the logged bit address is triggered (ON or OFF), the related information will be displayed on the Alarm component. (This component is only responsible for the logon of Alarm Setting, and the display needs to be done by Alarm component.)

Add/Modify Alarm Setting

1 Clicking the icon located in the Database Toolbar or the Alarm Setting in the Project Database allows an Alarm Setting dialog box to pop up.

3-8-3 Alarm Setting

3-249

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-3 A larm

S etting

2 Select the [Add] button to add the setting or select the [Modify] button to modify the existing setting.

Descriptions of Alarm Information Property

Triggered PT Select one PT to specify the Alarm Setting when multiple PTs were registered to the project.

PLC Address Specifies the bit address of the memory that triggers the read of the alarm.

Property ON When the specified bit address is ON, one piece of alarm information is generated.

OFF When the specified bit address is OFF, one piece of alarm information is generated.

Use Buzzer When the alarm information is triggered, the buzzer will be enabled. The Buzzing Time can be set with the unit of second.

Message Inputs the contents of alarm setting to be displayed. Clicking [Font] can set the Font and the related attributes.

Use Text Library Determines whether to use the contents logged in the Text Library. For the use of the Library, refer to [3-8-1 Text Library].

Language When using multi-language Text Library, you can select the language here and click Font to set the font attributes corresponding to text in each kind of language respectively.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-250 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Press the [OK] button to make the alarm setting displayed in the list. After the alarm setting is logged, the existed alarm setting can be edited by [Delete] or modified by [Modify] buttons. Press the [OK] button to complete the logon of the alarm setting.

Note In order to perform the communications effectively, specifying the continuous address is recommended as read address of the alarm information. For example, when you specify the continuous addresses from M100 to M199, whole the addresses from M100 to M199 can be read in the communications only once.

Event/Alarm Type The Event/Alarm is divided into 256 types, i.e. 0 to 255, in the NB-Designer.

Event, Alarm and Alarm Display can restrict the types of the displayed events respectively. For example, if the display type of Event Component is specified from 0 to 3 in the [Event Setting] tab of Event Properties, only the contents of event ranging from Type 0 to Type 3 will be displayed.

This option is used to select the type of the alarm and event displayed currently.

3-251

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-3 A larm

S etting

Example: To create an event log with the type of each event being different.

(1) Click the [Event Setting] of the [Project Database] and open the [Event Setting] dialog box. Click the [Add] and add a new event setting as below.

(2) Create the event triggered by the LB1 and LB2 in the same procedure as the LB0’s. The Type of the LB1 is specified to 1 and the Type of the LB2 is specified to 2.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-252 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

(3) Place two Event components with the addresses of LW0 in the Edit Window and the settings are as shown below.

(4) When the offline test is performed, the event with the format (type) 0 of ON and the trigger for the LB0 and the format (type) 1 of ON and the trigger for the LB1 is displayed in Event component 1 and the other event with the format (type) of ON and the trigger for the LB2 is displayed in Event component 2.

Event display component 2Event display component 1

3-253

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-4 E vent S

etting

The information logged in Event component will be displayed in the Event component. To display the information in the Event component, the information must be logged in the [Event Setting] database in advance. One bit or word address controls one piece of information. When the logged bit or word address is triggered (i.e. It is ON/OFF or the restricted value is triggered.), the corresponding information will be displayed in the Event component. (This component is only responsible for the event log, and the display needs to be done by Event component.)

Process of Adding/Modifying Event Setting

1 Clicking the icon located in Database Toolbar or Event Setting in the Project Database allow Event Setting dialog box pops up.

3-8-4 Event Setting

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-254 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

2 Select the [Add] button to add the information or select the [Modify] button to modify the existing information.

Descriptions of Event Information Properties

Triggered PT Select one PT to specify the Event Setting when multiple PTs were registered to the project.

Type Classifies the events and the available type is from 0 to 255. [Event Display] tab of the Event Display component can restrict the displayed event type.

Address Specify the register working as the trigger of the event. The type of memory can be changed into Bit or Word through Data Type.

Attribute Bit ON When the state of the bit address is turn from OFF to ON, one specified event record will be displayed.

OFF When the state of the bit address is turn from ON to OFF, one specified event record will be displayed.

3-255

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-4 E vent S

etting

Attribute Word < When the value of the specified word address is less than the specified value, one specified event record will be displayed.

> When the value of the specified word address is greater than the specified value, one specified event record will be displayed.

== When the value of the specified word address is equal to the specified value, one specified event record will be displayed. [Value Range] When the value of the specified word address is within the specified range, one event record will be generated. As shown below, check Value Range with Min Value & Max Value set to 5 and 10 respectively, if the value which is represented as N, of the specified word address is larger than 5 and smaller than 10, one specified event record will be displayed.

< > When the value of the specified word address is not equal to the specified value, one specified event record will be displayed. As shown below, check Value Range with Min Value & Max Value set to 15 and 30 respectively, if the value which is represented as N, of the specified word address is less than 15 or larger than 30, one specified event record will be displayed.

< = When the value of the specified word address is less than or equal to the specified value, one specified event record will be displayed.

> = When the value of the specified word address is greater than or equal to the specified value, one specified event record will be displayed.

Function Execute Macro

When event occurs, the selected Macro will be executed. *

Pop-up Screen

Confirm Dialog

Touching the event information displayed in the event component, the specified screen will pop up. And it needs to use the Close Screen function of the Function Key to close this Pop-up Screen.

Trigger Dialog

The specified screen will pop up when the event occurs. And it needs to use the Close Screen function of the Function Key to close this Pop-up Screen.

Write Value

0 When the event log occurs, the state of the specified bit memory will be set to 0.

1 When the event log occurs, the state of the specified bit memory will be set to 1.

Not When the event log occurs, the state of the specified bit memory will be reversed.

Descriptions of Event Information Properties

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-256 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

* Please refer to 3-9-3 Macro Triggering (Page 3-273).

3 Clicking [OK] allows the specified event setting added in the List of the [Event Setting] dialog box. The registered event setting can be deleted by [Delete] button or modified by [Modify] button. Click [OK] button to finish the registration of the event setting.

Note In order to perform the communications effectively, specifying the continuous address is recommended as read address of the Event Setting. For example, when you specify the continuous addresses from M100 to M199, whole the addresses from M100 to M199 can be read in the communications only once.

Message Inputs the contents of event or event display to be displayed. Clicking [Font] can set the Font Type and the related attributes.

Use Text Library

Determines whether to use the contents logged in the Text Library.

Language When using multi-language Text Library, you can select the language displayed as the event information here and click Font to set the font Property corresponding to text in each kind of language respectively.

TIP: The data and others stored in internal memory LW can be displayed in the event information. The available formats are follows:

%h:mm:s#: The Time of Occur. is indicated.

%y:mm:d#: The Date of Occur. is indicated.

%nnfmd: % represents the start symbol, nn represents the addresses of the internal memory LW from 00 to 99. f represents that the displayed number includes the decimal part. m represents the digit of the decimal digit. d represents the end symbol.

If %nnd is entered, the value excluded the digit of decimal digit will be displayed. For example, if you want to display the value stored in LW20 with one decimal digit, enter %20f1d. If the stored value in the PLC memory should be displayed, transferred it to internal memory LW to display it.

Use Buzzer When the event is triggered, the buzzer will be enabled. The Buzzing Time can be set with the unit of second.

Open Text Library

Opens the text library editing dialog box.

Open Variable Table

Open the variable editing dialog box.

Descriptions of Event Information Properties

3-257

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-5 P LC

C ontrol

When the corresponding control is triggered, PLC Control component can activate one specific operation.

PLC Control component is a powerful component group, which can realize a large variety of functions because it is more powerful than the general component. And its functions are as follows:

(1) Switch Screens: Changes the current screen.

(2) Write data (current base screen number) into PLC: Transfers the current Screen No. to the PLC.

(3) General-purpose PLC control: Realizes the data transmission between the PLC address and LW/RW.

(4) Backlight Off: Turns off the backlight.

(5) Backlight Off (Write Back): Turn OFF the back light. (The control bit will be reset.)

(6) Execute Macro: Executes the corresponding Macro number when the condition is met.

(7) Backlight On: Turns on the backlight.

(8) Backlight On (Write Back): Turn ON the back light. (The control bit will be reset.)

(9) General PLC Control (Expansion)

(10) Change Screen (Ignore screen 0)

Note Do not specify the same address in the functions of Switch Screens, Change Screen (Ignore screen 0), and Write data (current base screen number) into PLC.

Process of creating one PLC Control

1 Press the PLC Control icon to make the list of PLC Control pop up.

2 Press Add button to create a new PLC Control or press Modify and Delete buttons to modify the PLC Control and delete the selected setting respectively.

3-8-5 PLC Control

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-258 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3 Specify the options displayed in the PLC Control dialog box correctly.

Area/Variable: Specifies the Area/Variable of the devices performing the PLC control operations.

Address: Specifies the addresses of the devices performing the PLC control operations.

Data Format: Includes BIN or BCD.

Function Mode: Specifies the operation types of the setting. There are 12 types available, and their functions will be described later in details.

Macro: Sets the No. of Macro program to be executed when the Function is Execute Macro.

4 Press the OK button to exit from the PLC Control dialog box.

5 Repress the OK button to exit from the list of PLC Control.

3-259

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-5 P LC

C ontrol

Function Mode

1 Switch Screens

This operation needs 2 consecutive word addresses. When the [Read Address] is switched to a valid screen No., the current screen will be closed and the specified screen will appear. Specify the number in the destination screen in the [Read Address]. The number after switching will be written in [Read Address + 1]

For example, set the address to DM0, Data Format to BCD and the current screen to Frame 0. If DM0 is changed to 10, the current screen will be switched to Frame 10, and 10 will be returned to DM1.

Note Each time the [Change Screen] Function Key is pressed, the current screens is closed and the destination screen is displayed. The function of [Switch Screens] of the PLC control is similar to the [Change Screen] function of the Function Key. Their difference is the respect whether function is operated by touching the screen or it is performed by the PLC memory control. When the value of Read Address is modified to an available screen No., the current screen will be closed and the screen specified with the Read Address will be displayed. Then the content of the Read Address in written in the Read Address + 1. This operations can be executed only when the Read Address is modified.

2 Write Data (Current Base Screen No.) into PLC

The number of the base screen currently displayed will be notified to the PLC.

When there is a PLC Control with the settings shown as above, word address DM0 will store the No. of the current base screen.

3 General PLC Control

The data transmission between the PLC and the PT can be controlled.

It can be divided into 4 types according to the direction of data transmission:

(a) PLCRW (Recipe Data Memory), type code 1.

(b) PLCLW (Local Data memory of PT), type code 2.

(c) RW (Recipe Data memory)PLC, type code 3.

(d) LW (Local Data memory of PT)PLC, type code 4.

The specific instructions are as follows:

Select General PLC Control as Control Type in PLC Control setting dialog box, and select the data area and the address of the data transmitted by the [Read Address]. Please note that the unit must be word, and the system automatically allocate 4 continuous addresses, which are used as the controlling addresses of the data transmission. And the specific meanings and usage methods are as follows:

(1) Read Address: Select the 4 types of execution type codes. When new value is written to the memory, the system execute the corresponding transmission function. After the transmission is detected, the memory will be reset to 0.

(2) Read Address + 1: Specify the size of the data transmitted. The number of the word specified at this moment will be transmitted.

Read Address For screen switching control

Read Address + 1 No. of the destination screen

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-260 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

(3) Read Address + 2: Specify the offset of the transmitted data address of the PLC side. The offset is specified from the address of [Specified Read Address + 4].

For example, if the Read Address set in the PLC General Control is DM100, and the data contained in memory DM102 is 4. The starting address of the transmitted PLC data is DM108 = [(100 + 4) + 4].

(4) Read Address + 3 : Specify the offset of the transmitted data address at the sides of local memory (LW) of the PT or Recipe data memory (RW)

In the example listed above, if the data contained in DM103 is 100, the starting address of the transmitted PT data operated during the transmission is RW (LW)100=(0 + 100).

Here is the procedure which uses the PLC control, to transmit the data includes 30 words starting from DM100, to the data block of the same size starting from RW200 in the Recipe Data memory of the PLC.

(1) Firstly, specify the PLC control component set with [General-purpose PLC Control] for the control select and DM10 for [Read Address].

(2) Secondly, specify the size of the data and the offset address of the controlling data. DM11 is specified to 30 (it means the number of transmitted words is 30 words.) DM12 is specified to 86 (the starting address is DM100=(10+4+86) in the PLC and DM13 is specified to 200 (the destination address is RW200=(0+200), respectively.

(3) Finally, specifying the execute type code according to the direction of the data transmission allows the data transmission. If DM10 is specified to 1, the number of the specified data will be transmitted from the starting address of the PLC to the Recipe Data memory of the PT. If DM10 is specified to 3, the direction to transmit the data will be reversed.

The other transmission to two destinations are performed in the same procedure as above.

4 Backlight Off

This operation uses one bit address to control the closing of the backlight, and when the bit address is ON, the backlight will be closed.

In the settings shown as above, when D_bit0.00 is ON, the backlight turns off. In this case, when the user touches the PT, the backlight will automatically light on, and at this time the D_bit0.00 is still ON. If the user touches the D_bit0.00 again, it will be turned OFF, thus returning to the state before the backlight is closed.

3-261

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-5 P LC

C ontrol

5 Backlight Off (Write Back)

The operation of this option is similar to [Backlight Off], but the address of this bit of PLC will be cleared to 0 while as well as the back light turns Off and then the bit address turns ON.

In the settings shown as above, when D_bit0.00 turns ON, the backlight is OFF, and D_bit0.00 is automatically turned OFF. When the user touches the PT, the backlight turns ON and D_bit0.00 remains OFF.

6 Execute Macro

When the state of the specified bit address is ON, the selected Macro ID will be triggered.

Area/Variable and Address: Refers to the address to trigger the Macro program execution. The Macro program will be executed when this bit is 1, while not executed when this bit is 0.

Macro ID: Select a Macro to be executed.

Execute Method: ONOFF: When the specified bit turns OFF from ON or vice versa, the Macro will be executed.

OFFON: When the specified bit turns ON from OFF, the Macro will be executed.

ONOFF: When the specified bit turns OFF from ON, the Macro will be executed.

ON: When the specified bit is ON, the Macro will be executed.

OFFON, Reset: When the specified bit turns ON from OFF, the Macro will be executed and the specified bit will be forced into OFF.

ONOFF, Reset: When the specified bit turns OFF from ON, the Macro will be executed and the specified bit will be forced into ON.

Note Only when the Macro is added within the project, this function is available. If the Macro code is removed after specifying the Execute Macro in the Function Mode option the PLC Control dialog box by the Function selection, the code is converted automatically to the Macro in the default. If the Macro does not exist, [Macro] column is left to blank as the default.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-262 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

7 Backlight On

This operation uses one bit address to control the lighting of the backlight, and when the bit address is ON, the backlight turns ON.

In the settings shown as above, when D_bit0.00 is ON, and the back light will turn ON. If the user touches D_bit0.00 again, it will turn OFF, thus returning to the state before the backlight lights on.

8 Backlight On (Write Back)

The operation of this option is similar to [Backlight On], but the address of this bit of PLC will be cleared to OFF while the bit address turns ON.

In the settings shown as above, D_bit0.00 turns OFF automatically as well as the back light turns ON when the D_bit0.00 turns ON.

3-263

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-8 P roject D

atabase

3

3-8-5 P LC

C ontrol

9 General-purpose PLC Control (Expansion)

General PLC Control (Extend) is similar to General PLC Control, but the occupied address is different, i.e. General PLC Control occupies 4 words while General PLC Control (Extend) occupies 6 words (extending word to double-word). Refer to the section of General-purpose PLC Control for the details.

The method is as follows:

(1) Read Address: Similar to General-purpose PLC Control.

(2) Read Address + 1: Similar to General-purpose PLC Control.

(3) Read Address + 2: Refers to the address offset of the data memory of PLC during the transmission and it occupies 2 words. Please note that this offset is specified from the address memory with Read Address + 6.

(4) Read Address + 4: Refers to 2 words occupation.

3 Functions of NB-Designer

3-264 NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

10 Change Screen (Ignore screen 0)

The difference between Switch Screens and Change Screen (Ignore screen 0) is as follows:

Switch Screens: When the value of specified address is 0, it will be switched to Screen 0.

Change Screen (Ignore screen 0): When the value of specified address is 0, screen switching is not made.

3-265

3 Functions of NB-Designer

NB-series Programmable Terminals NB-Designer Operation Manual(V106)

3-9 M acro Function

3

3-9-1 C reate a S

im ple M

acro P rogram

3-9 Macro Function

Macro is the function allows the user to create and execute the simple and original programs. The user can add the functions such a arithmetical operations or discriminant of the conditions which are not be supported by the basic functions of the NB-Designer. Using the Macro function, the user also convert the display processing in the screen or the data processing used to be performed in the PLC. This function allows the PC loading reduced. The Macro of the NB-Designer conforms to C Language (ANSI C89).

This section provides a brief of the Macro variables. The Macro variables are classified into two types such as internal variables and external variables. Internal variables: The variables are available only within the Macro Program. The internal variables

can be defined in the [Macro Variable Table] or the [Macro Editing Window]. External variables: The variables are to read and write the values with the external controllers. The

external variables are necessary to be defined in the [Macro Variable Table] in advance. The defined external variables can be used in the [Macro Editing Win- dow].

Storage Format of the variables used in the [Macro Variables Table]

Read/Write type of Macrocode Variable

3-9-1 Create a Simple Macro Program